JP6493986B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player.

  As a gaming machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and the game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a prize game medium such as a predetermined number of prize balls is obtained. Some are paid out to players. Furthermore, a variable display device capable of variably displaying identification information such as special symbols (also referred to as “fluctuation”) when a game medium wins a predetermined winning area (a start winning occurs) is provided. Some of the information is displayed in a variable display state, and when the result is a special game result (for example, a jackpot symbol), the player is controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, controlled to a jackpot game state). .

  In such a gaming machine, various effects are displayed to improve the interest of the game. For example, there is a gaming machine capable of effect display that simultaneously displays a plurality of images (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-165961

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when a plurality of image displays are performed at the same time and there is an overlap (overlap) between the image displays, one image display hinders the other image display, and the player is concerned about the contents. There were things that could not be recognized or misunderstood.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above situation, and even if a plurality of image displays are performed simultaneously, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing or misrecognizing the contents, and to improve the gaming interests. An object is to provide a gaming machine.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the present application is:
A gaming machine that includes an image display device, performs variable display of identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Production state control means capable of controlling the production state in the advantageous state to any one of a plurality of types of production states;
Notification effect means for executing a notification effect related to the number of game media granted during the advantageous state;
Predetermined display means capable of displaying a predetermined display corresponding to the variable display;
Character display means capable of displaying a character capable of executing a predetermined effect;
With
The notification production means is
When the production state control means is controlled to the first production state, the notification production by the first notification mode is executed,
When the production state control unit is controlled to the second production state different from the first production state, the notification production by the second notification mode different from the first notification mode is executed,
The image display device can simultaneously display a first image and a second image which is an image different from the first image;
When the first image and the second image are displayed in an overlapping manner, it is possible to display at least a part of the overlapping portion in the front side image in a transparent state,
When the predetermined display acts on the character, it is possible to cause the character to execute the predetermined effect,
There are a plurality of display modes of the predetermined display corresponding to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state,
The lower the degree of expectation that the display mode of the predetermined display is controlled to the advantageous state, the higher the rate of acting on the character.
It is characterized by that.
(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the first aspect of the present application includes an image display device (for example, the image display device 5), and variable display of identification information (for example, a decorative pattern (effect pattern). A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
Production state control means (production control microcomputer) capable of controlling the production state in the advantageous state (the production state during the round, etc.) to any one of a plurality of types of production states (A mode or B mode in FIG. 49). 700)
Notification effect means for executing a notification effect (such as a notification effect by the first notification image 204 and the second notification image 214 shown in FIG. 49) related to the number of game media (number of game balls, etc.) given during the advantageous state ( Production control microcomputer 700, etc.)
The notification production means is
When the effect state control means is controlling to the first effect state (A mode or the like), the notification effect according to the first notification mode (the first notification image 204 or the like shown in FIG. 49) is executed,
When the presentation state control means controls the second presentation state (B mode or the like) different from the first presentation state, a second notification mode (second notification shown in FIG. 49) different from the first notification mode. Execute the notification effect by the image 214)
The image display device is configured such that a first image (for example, a first preview image that is an image of a star Y01 including the characters “chance” in FIG. 37) and a second image (an image different from the first image). For example, the character Y02-1 in FIG. 37 and the second notice image that is an image of the memo Y02 including the character Y02-2 can be displayed simultaneously.
When the first image and the second image are displayed so as to overlap each other, it is possible to display at least a part of the overlapping portion in the front side image in a transparent state (for example, in the first notice image) The memo Y02, which is the second notice image, is displayed on the front side (front side) rather than a certain star Y01, and at least a part of the memo Y02 (the base part of the memo Y02) is translucent. FIG. 37) A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to such a configuration, even if a plurality of image displays are performed simultaneously, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing or misrecognizing the contents, and to improve the gaming interest.

(2) The gaming machine of (1),
The notification effect means that the number of game media granted during the advantageous state has reached a predetermined number (as shown in S941 of FIG. 52, the total number of acquired game balls exceeds n times 500, etc.) The notification effect according to the first notification mode (such as the first notification image 204 shown in FIG. 49) is executed.

  According to such a configuration, the entertainment of the game in the advantageous state can be improved by diversifying the notification effects.

(3) The gaming machine of (2),
The notification effecting means indicates that the number of game media provided during the advantageous state has become a specific number different from the predetermined number (as shown in S943 of FIG. 52, the total number of acquired game balls is n times 2500). Etc.), the notification effect in the second notification mode (second notification image 214 shown in FIG. 49, etc.) is executed.

  According to such a configuration, the entertainment of the game in the advantageous state can be improved by diversifying the notification effects.

(4) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
In the advantageous state, effect state selection means (mode selection image 210 in FIG. 49, for selecting whether the first effect state (A mode or the like) or the second effect state (B mode or the like) is selected. The processing of S925 in FIG.

  According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to select a production state, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the advantageous state.

(5) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4),
Advantageous state control means (such as a game control microcomputer 560) for controlling to the advantageous state (such as a big hit gaming state) when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (such as a big hit display result);
In the advantageous state, the game medium (game ball or the like) can be changed between a first state (open state or the like) in which the game medium can be won and a second state (closed state or the like) in which the game medium is difficult or impossible to win. Variable means (special variable winning ball apparatus 620 etc.);
Each time a game medium wins the variable means, a game medium number display means capable of variably displaying the number of assigned game media (the production control microcomputer 700, the acquired total number display image 205 in the A mode in FIG. 49, the B mode). Acquisition total display image 215, S933 in FIG. 51, and the like.

  According to such a configuration, since the number of assigned game media can be variably displayed, the interest of the game in the advantageous state can be improved.

(6) The gaming machine of (5),
The advantageous state control means includes the variable means (special variable winning ball apparatus) until at least one of a specified period (29 seconds or the like) elapses or a predetermined number (10 or the like) of game media is won. 620 etc.) can be controlled to the advantageous state in which a unit game that can be changed to the first state (open state etc.) is executed a prescribed number of times (15 times etc.)
The notification effect means is the number of game media awarded when a special number (11th, 12th, etc.) of game media is won in one unit game (over-winning, etc.). Is added, and the notification effect is executed (a process of adding a prize ball in the overwinning in the process of S930 to S932 in FIG. 51).

  According to such a configuration, since the notification effect is executed after adding the number of game media given in a single unit game, the number of game media awarded more than the specified number, it is appropriate for the player. It is possible to execute a notification effect.

(7) The gaming machine of (6),
The advantageous state control means includes, as the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (such as a big hit gaming state based on a probability variation big hit) and a second advantageous state (a big hit game based on a normal big hit) having a lower advantage than the first advantageous state. Status etc.)
Based on the fact that the game medium has won the special number (11th, 12th, etc.) in one unit game in the first advantageous state (over-winning, etc.), the notification effect in a special mode ( As shown in the second embodiment, the first grand prize opening LED 20c can emit a rainbow light, and a predetermined presentation sound can be output from the speaker 27. The processing of S3923 and S3924 in the microcomputer 700 for use).

  According to such a configuration, by executing the notification effect in the special mode based on the fact that the game medium has won a special number larger than the specified number in one unit game in the first advantageous state, Interest can be improved.

(8) The gaming machine of (6),
Special state control means that can be controlled to a special state (probability change state, etc.) based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a specific region (a specific region in the second big prize opening, etc.) provided in the variable means in the advantageous state. (Game control microcomputer 560, etc.)
After the game medium has passed through the specific area in the advantageous state, the game medium has won the special number (11th, 12th, etc.) in one unit game in the advantageous state (over winning has occurred) Etc.) based on the notification effect in a special manner (notification effect of a mode in which the first grand prize opening LED 20c emits rainbow light and a predetermined winning sound is output from the speaker 27 as shown in the second embodiment) ) Can be executed (the processing of S3923 and S3924 in the production control microcomputer 700 shown in FIG. 54).

  According to such a configuration, after the game medium passes through the specific area, the notification effect in the special mode is executed based on the fact that the game medium has won a special number larger than the prescribed number in one unit game in the advantageous state. By this, the interest of the game by notification production can be improved.

(9) The gaming machine according to any one of (5) to (8),
Notification mode determining means for determining the notification effect mode as one of a plurality of types of notification modes (notification in white characters, notification in rainbow characters, etc., as shown in the modified example). )When,
A holding storage means (such as a holding storage buffer) for storing as variable storage of identification information that has not yet been started;
The notification mode determination means determines the notification mode based on the fact that a variable display that is the specific display result (a jackpot display result or the like) is stored in the reserved storage during the advantageous state (modified example) As shown in FIG. 4, the notification effect is changed to a rainbow-colored character based on the fact that there is a reserved memory that becomes a jackpot display result in the reserved memory buffer during the big hit).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine the notification mode of the notification effect based on the fact that the variable display that is the specific display result is stored in the hold memory, and to improve the interest of the game in the advantageous state Can do.

(10) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9),
The first image is a first effect image that is an effect image that gives an expectation to an advantageous state,
Unlike the first effect image, the second image may be a second effect image that is an effect image that gives an expectation to an advantageous state.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing or misrecognizing the contents of the effect, and to improve the game entertainment.

(11) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10),
Predetermined display means capable of displaying a predetermined display (for example, hold display HR, active display AC) corresponding to the variable display (for example, a hold area where the hold display is displayed under the control of the effect control CPU 120 in the image display device 5) 5HA, an active character area 5HB in which an active display is displayed),
Character display means (for example, in the image display device 5) capable of displaying a character (for example, A character CHA, B character CHB) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, an explanation effect that is a character effect, a change expectation suggesting effect). , An active character area 5HB in which the A character CHA and the B character CHB are displayed under the control of the CPU 120 for effect control,
Further comprising
It may be possible to cause the character to execute the predetermined effect by the predetermined display acting on the character (for example, an aspect in which the active display AC passes a letter to the A character CHA).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve game entertainment.

(12) The gaming machine of (11),
The predetermined display has a plurality of types (for example, white, blue, green, red display), and the ratio of the predetermined display acting on the character may be different depending on the type of the predetermined display (for example, production) The control CPU 120 determines whether or not the character effect is executed based on the character effect execution / non-execution determination ratio in FIG. 24).

  According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the type of specific display, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(13) The gaming machine according to (11) or (12),
The predetermined display includes, when starting variable display of the identification information, an active display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information, and a hold display corresponding to the variable display of the identification information that has not yet started,
The active display may act on the character (for example, an aspect in which the A character CHA receives a letter from the active display AC) so that the character can execute the predetermined effect.

  According to such a configuration, there are abundant production patterns of active display, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(14) The gaming machine of (13),
A first area for displaying the hold display (for example, the hold area 5HA) and a second area for displaying the active display (for example, the active character area 5HB);
The character may be displayed together with the active display in the second area (for example, A character CHA and B character CHB are displayed in the active character area 5HB).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve game entertainment.

(15) The gaming machine according to any one of (11) to (14),
The character can be displayed in at least a part of the period during which the variable display is being executed (for example, a period during which the super reach is not being executed during the change) and a period during which the variable display is not being executed. May be.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve game entertainment.

(16) The gaming machine according to any one of (11) to (15),
There are a plurality of types of the predetermined effects (for example, an explanation effect that is a character effect, a variation expectation suggestion effect), and the proportion of the advantageous state may be different depending on the type of the predetermined effect to be executed. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of either the explanation effect or the expected change expectation effect based on the character effect execution type determination ratio in FIG. 25).

  According to such a structure, the production pattern of a predetermined display becomes abundant and it can improve game entertainment.

(17) The gaming machine according to any one of (11) to (16),
There are a plurality of modes when the predetermined display acts on the character (for example, a mode in which the active display AC passes a letter to the A character CHA and a mode in which a present box is passed). Depending on the type of mode when acting on the character, the predetermined presentation may be executed (for example, the timing at which the A character CHA receives the letter and the timing at which the present box is received differ, and the timing at which the letter is opened) The timing of opening the gift box is different).

  According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the manner in which the predetermined display acts on the character, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(18) The gaming machine according to (14),
When the character existing in the second area moves to the first area (for example, in FIG. 29, the B character CHB moves from the active character area 5HB to the holding area 5HA), the holding indication is displayed. You may be made to be able to perform the hold change effect which changes (for example, the hold change effect which the color of a hold display changes).

  According to such a configuration, the effects by the characters become diverse, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(19) The gaming machine of (14),
When the character existing in the second area moves to the third area (for example, the main area 5HD in the image display device 5) (for example, in FIG. 32, the B character CHB changes from the active character area 5HB to the main area). Moving to 5HD) and suggesting effects (for example, the expected fluctuation expectation effects) suggesting the degree of expectation in the advantageous state may be executable.

  According to such a configuration, the effects by the characters become diverse, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(20) The gaming machine according to (14),
A predetermined area (for example, a V-con area 5HC in the image display device 5) is provided between the first area and the second area,
A special effect (for example, a timer effect) is executed in response to the predetermined area (for example, the V-con display VC is in a MAX state) due to a predetermined item (for example, the V-con display VC). It may be possible.

  According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the predetermined area, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(21) The gaming machine according to any one of (11) to (20),
The hold display before the hold display (for example, the hold display HR that is the target of the hold change effect) that is the target of the pre-reading notice that is an indication of the degree of expectation to be in the advantageous state can change to a specific mode (for example, In FIG. 34, when the character of the hold display HR is changed), there are a plurality of types of specific modes, and a specific effect (for example, a mini game in FIG. 34) corresponding to the type of the specific mode is executed. The display mode of the hold display that is the target of suggesting the degree of expectation in the advantageous state may be changeable (for example, in FIG. 34, the color of the hold display HR that is the target of the hold change effect changes). To do).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve game entertainment.

(22) The gaming machine according to (14),
As an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that will be in the advantageous state, the first area and the second area may be changed to a special mode (for example, in FIG. 35, the degree of expectation of jackpot is indicated. As an effect, “WARNING” is displayed in the reserved area 5HA and the active character area 5HB).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve game entertainment.

(23) The gaming machine of (20),
In a predetermined period (for example, reach effect period) during execution of the variable display, the display in the predetermined area may be moved to a predetermined position (for example, in FIG. 36, the display of the V-con area 5HC is reached). Move to the lower left during the production period).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the display in the predetermined area from interfering with other effects and the like, and to improve the game entertainment.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a figure for demonstrating random value MR1-MR3. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a special figure holding | maintenance memory | storage part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the determination process at the time of a start winning prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table and a jackpot classification determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows an example of the selection ratio of the color change pattern according to the holding | maintenance order and the fluctuation pattern in the case of holding 1 and holding 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the selection ratio of the color change pattern according to the holding | maintenance order in the case of the holding | maintenance 3, and a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of the selection ratio of the color change pattern according to the holding | maintenance order and the fluctuation pattern in the case of the holding | maintenance 4. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of holding information. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production | generation setting process at the time of a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a character effect setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution presence determination ratio of a character effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the determination ratio of a character production type. It is a figure which shows an example of the determination rate of the character display classification at the time of the said change expectation degree suggestion production. It is a figure which shows an example of a character display period. It is a figure which shows an example of the display at the time of the said change expectation degree suggestion effect and description effect execution. It is a figure which shows an example of the display at the time of the pending | holding change effect execution using B character. It is a figure which shows an example of the display at the time of the said change expectation degree suggestion production | presentation using a present box. It is a figure which shows an example of the production timing at the time of the case where a letter is used, and the case where a present box is used. It is a figure which shows an example of the display at the time of the fluctuation expectation degree production | presentation execution using B character. It is a figure which shows an example of the display in the case of performing a timer effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display in the case of changing the mode of the hold display before the hold display used as the object of a hold change effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display in the case of changing the aspect of a holding | maintenance area | region and an active character area | region. It is a figure which shows an example of a display in the case of moving the display of a V-con area | region during reach. It is a figure which shows an example of the display in the case of transmitting a display. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a figure which shows a hit classification table. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in a main board | substrate (game control board). It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit determination table and the big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern table used in order to determine a fluctuation pattern in a table format. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a figure for demonstrating alerting | reporting effect. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a round. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a round. It is a flowchart which shows the round post-process of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the round post-process of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the round post-process of 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of the alerting | reporting effect of 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of the alerting | reporting effect of 3rd Embodiment.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes) and the like. Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do.

  The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the image display device 5, in response to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game. In a decorative symbol display area, which is a plurality of variable display portions such as three, for example, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of decorative identification information that can be individually identified are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the main area 5HD at the top of the screen of the image display device 5. And in response to the start of one of the changes in the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game, In each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas, variation of decorative symbols (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol can be changed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas in the image display device 5. The confirmed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the display result is stopped and displayed. Note that the confirmed decorative design may be different from the decorative design displayed during variable display. For example, a decorative pattern other than the scrolled decorative pattern may be a confirmed decorative pattern.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or a special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is synchronized. Then, a variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be distinguished from each other is performed, and a finalized decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). In addition, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means that identification information such as a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and the variable display is ended. . On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed deterministically, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbols completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  On the lower left side of the screen of the image display device 5, a holding area 5HA is arranged. In the hold area 5HA, hold display is performed to display the variable display hold number (special figure hold storage number) corresponding to the special figure game so as to be specified. Here, the variable display suspension corresponding to the special figure game is such that the game ball enters the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Generated based on a start winning by (for example, passing). That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done. In this embodiment, the hold display is performed by displaying the same number of symbols as the variable display being held (in this embodiment, it is a circle or the like, and is also referred to as a hold display symbol hereinafter). One hold display symbol corresponds to one variable display held. The held variable display corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure and the second special figure is represented by a hold display symbol displayed in the hold area 5HA.

  For example, the start condition of the special figure game (first start condition) using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is established by the occurrence of the first start prize where the game ball enters the first start prize opening. If the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not established, the first special figure holding memory number is incremented by one (increment) And the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, when a second start prize is entered in which a game ball enters the second start prize opening, a special figure game start condition (second start condition) using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is established. If the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second special figure holding memory number is incremented by one (increment) And the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first special figure holding memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. Is started, the second special figure reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decremented).

  The variable display hold memory number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also referred to as a total hold memory number. When simply referring to the “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number. It may refer to a concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total reserved memory number).

  You may make it provide the indicator which displays the number of special figure holding | maintenance with the holding | maintenance area | region 5HA instead of the holding | maintenance area | region 5HA. In the example shown in FIG. 1, a first hold indicator 25A for displaying the number of special figure hold memories in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B together with the hold area 5HA. And a second hold indicator 25B. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B has a number (for example, 4) corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number, for example. LED). Here, the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number are displayed according to the number of lighted LEDs.

  An active character area 5HB is arranged at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. In the active character area 5HB, display corresponding to the variable display being executed and display of a character performing execution of a character effect, which will be described later, are performed. A display corresponding to the variable display being executed is referred to as an active display (also referred to as a fluctuation display, a variable display display, a digestion display, or a current display). In the active character area 5HB, for example, in response to the hold display erased (digested) in the hold area 5HA in response to the start of the special game using the first special figure when the first start condition is satisfied. Active display is performed. In the active character area 5HB, for example, the hold display erased (digested) in the hold area 5HA in response to the start of the special game using the second special figure when the second start condition is satisfied. An active display corresponding to is performed.

  The image display device 5 can display a plurality of images simultaneously. When a plurality of images are displayed in an overlapped manner on the image display device 5, at least a part of the overlapping portion in the near side (front side) image may be in a transmissive state (transparent state). When at least a part of the near-side image is in a transparent state, the player can easily recognize the display content of the back-side image, and the gaming interest is improved. When a plurality of images are displayed in an overlapping manner, at least a part of the portion other than the overlapping portion in the near side (front side) image may be in a transmissive state. Further, if a plurality of images are not completely overlapped but a part of each image is overlapped, it becomes easy to recognize both. As a result, when a plurality of images are displayed in a superimposed manner, at least a part of the overlapping portion in the near side image is made transparent so that the image overlap (overlap) occurs so that the near side image is displayed on the back side. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the content or misunderstanding due to the obstruction of the display of the side image.

  In the image display device 5, the overlapping image is displayed in, for example, an active character area 5HB in which various effect images, decorative symbols, hold display, display corresponding to variable display being executed, character display, and the like are performed. And the like. The present invention will be described more specifically with reference to the following examples, but the present invention is not limited to the following examples. For example, when various effect images overlap, at least a part of the overlapping portion in the effect image on the near side may be in a transmissive state (transparent state). Further, when the decorative design and the effect image overlap, at least a part of the overlapping portion in the near side image may be in a transmissive state (transparent state). Further, when the decorative symbols overlap, at least a part of the overlapping portion of the front decorative symbols may be in a transmissive state (transparent state). Further, when the image displayed in the active character area 5HB and the hold display overlap, at least a part of the overlapping portion in the near-side image may be in a transparent state (transparent state). Further, when the effect image and the hold display overlap, at least a part of the overlapping portion in the near side image may be in a transmissive state (transparent state). Further, when the image displayed in the active character area 5HB and the effect display overlap, at least a part of the overlapping portion in the near-side image may be in a transmissive state (transparent state).

  The same applies when three or more images overlap. For example, there are an image A, an image B, and an image C, and a part of the image A and a part of the image B overlap, a part of the image A and a part of the image C overlap, and the image B and the image C overlap. When the image A and the image B overlap with each other and the image A and the image C overlap with each other, and the image A is on the most front side, at least a part of the overlap with the other images in the image A is It may be in a transmissive state.

  In the case where a plurality of images are overlapped, the ratio of the overlapping portion in one image is not particularly limited. However, if the ratio of the overlapping portion is too large, the player may not be able to recognize the content or the content may be misidentified. Since it becomes high, it is preferable to set it as 50% or less (half or less).

  In addition, in the case where a plurality of images are overlapped, the player occupies the contents of the display (for example, characters, characters, specific graphics, etc.) that play a role of transmitting specific information to the player in the images. From the viewpoint of surely avoiding being unable to recognize or misrecognizing the content, it may be prevented from being transparently displayed (opaque) or may not overlap with other images. The “first effect image” that is an effect image that gives an expectation to the advantageous state and a “second effect image” that is an effect image that gives an expectation to the advantageous state are different from the first effect image An example will be described below, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first effect image is an image including a background portion, a specific figure, and a character, and the second effect image is an image including a background portion, a character, and a character. The first effect image Is located on the back side, the second effect image is located on the near side, and a part of the first effect image and a part of the second effect image overlap, the background portion of the second effect image is made translucent, By preventing the character and the character from being transparent, the background portion of the first effect image on the back side, the specific figure, and the character may be recognized. Thereby, the player can recognize clearly the specific figure and character of a 1st effect image, and the character and character of a 2nd effect image. In the above, when a specific figure, character, etc. of the first effect image overlaps with a character, character, etc. of the second effect image, there is a concern that the content may be misidentified by the player depending on the color, size, mode of overlap, etc. Therefore, in such a case, the specific graphic or character of the first effect image may not overlap with the character or character of the second effect image. In such a case, only the background part of the second effect image overlaps a specific figure, character, or the like of the first effect image. In the above description, when the expectation level indicated by the first effect image is high and the expectation level indicated by the second effect image is normal, the second effect image is a character part in order to make the player pay attention to the first effect image. And the character portion may be translucent. Furthermore, in the above, when the expectation degree indicated by the first effect image is normal and the expectation is very high (intense heat) in either the character or the character in the second effect image, 2 In order to draw attention to a portion (character or character) showing intense heat in the effect image, only the portion showing intense heat is not transmitted in the second effect image, and parts other than the portion showing intense heat are made translucent. Good.

  Further, in the case where a plurality of images overlap, the transparency of the transmissive portion in the near-side image is not particularly limited, but may be such that the color and shape of the back-side image can be clearly recognized, It is good also as a grade which can recognize the color, shape, etc. of an image dimly.

  Further, when a plurality of images overlap, the transparency may be controlled according to the situation. For example, when the degree of expectation is normal (when the degree of expectation is low), it is displayed transparently. When the degree of expectation is high (in the case of intense heat), it is not transmitted (not opaque). You may control. Further, the degree of transmission and the transmission range may vary while the images are displayed in an overlapping manner. For example, the degree of transmission may change gradually. Furthermore, at a certain point in time, the transmission state may change to a non-transmission state, or the non-transmission state may change to the transmission state.

  In addition, a variety of effects can be achieved by using a plurality of overlapping images and controlling transparency. For example, when performing an effect indicating that the degree of expectation is high in the near side image and performing an effect indicating that the degree of expectation is normal in the back side image, expect the player's attention to the near side image. In order to indicate that the degree is high, the transparency of the image on the near side may gradually decrease, and the image on the back side may be gradually unrecognizable. Conversely, when performing an effect indicating that the degree of expectation is normal in the near side image and performing an effect indicating that the expectation level is high in the back side image, direct the player's attention to the image on the back side. In order to show that the degree of expectation is high, the transparency of the near side image may gradually increase so that the back side image can be gradually and clearly recognized. Furthermore, as an effect indicating that the degree of expectation is high, an effect indicating that the degree of expectation is normal is started in the near side image and the back side image, and then the transparency of the near side image is gradually lowered. When the back side image gradually becomes unrecognizable, and the transparency of the near side image becomes gradually higher and the back side image can be clearly recognized, the back side image is highly expected. An effect such as a change to an image indicating, etc. may also be mentioned.

  A V-con region 5HC is arranged at the lower center of the screen of the image display device 5 and between the holding region 5HA and the active character region 5HB. In the V-con area 5HC, a display simulating a stick controller 31A described later is performed.

  A movable effect member 60 is provided in the vicinity of a predetermined edge in the display area of the image display device 5 (here, near the right side). The movable effect member 60 is tilted toward the left side of FIG. 1 with the lower end portion as a fulcrum on the image display device 5 side by the rotational drive of the movable effect member motor 61 shown in FIG. 2, and the upper end portion in the image display device 5. A production model (production equipment device for production) that advances to the front of the display area is configured. That is, the movable effect member 60 can be changed between a non-tilting state extending in the vertical direction and the above-described tilting state by rotational driving of the movable effect member motor 61 shown in FIG.

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A is provided, and on the right side of the ordinary winning ball device 6A, an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed between a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. (Ordinary electric accessory) is provided and a second start winning opening is formed.

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the gaming ball does not enter the second start winning opening. To. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the on state, so that the game ball can enter the second start winning opening. Put it in a state. Note that the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is normally opened when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, and the game ball can enter the second start winning opening, while the expanded opening state when the solenoid 81 is in the on state. However, it may be configured so that the game ball is difficult to enter. As described above, the normal variable winning ball device 6B has the first variable state such as the open state or the expanded open state where the game ball can enter the second start winning port, the closed state where the game ball cannot enter, or the difficult entry. It is configured to be able to change to a second variable state such as a normally open state. The first variable state may be a state in which the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening as compared with the second variable state.

  A game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (prize game media), and the first special figure holding memory number is predetermined. If the value is equal to or less than the upper limit value (for example, “4”), the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value. In this case, the second start condition is satisfied.

  The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be one that directly pays out game balls that are prize balls, or may be one that gives a score corresponding to the number of game balls that are prize balls.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and the specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. As a big prize opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening and the game ball enters the big winning opening (for example, Cannot pass). On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the big prize opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special prize opening. Become. In this way, the special winning opening as the specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball can easily enter and is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter and is disadvantageous for the player. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot enter the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball is difficult to enter the big prize opening may be provided.

  The game ball that has entered the big prize opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Thus, when a game ball enters the large winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, for example, when a gaming ball enters another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls are paid out. Therefore, if the special prize winning ball device 7 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special prize winning opening, which is a first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the special prize winning port and obtain a prize ball, which is disadvantageous for the player. There are two states.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. An ordinary symbol (also called “ordinary diagram” or “ordinary diagram”) that is identification information is displayed variably (variably displayed). Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or plural general winning openings that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). Yes. The stick controller 31A includes an operation stick that the player holds, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). Yes. The trigger button can be operated in a predetermined direction by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) in a state where the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation on the trigger button may be incorporated in the operation rod.

  A controller sensor unit 35 </ b> A (see FIG. 2) including a tilt direction sensor unit for detecting a tilt operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided in the lower pan body inside the stick controller 31 </ b> A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation pole when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the photo sensor.

  The member forming the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B (a player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). 2). The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 35 </ b> B that detects the player's operation act on the push button 31 </ b> B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31 </ b> B.

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, and a touch sensor board are arranged on the back of the game board or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control.

  On the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like are mounted. The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (detection signals indicating that a game medium has been passed or entered) from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100. The solenoid circuit 111 uses a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for driving each solenoid such as a signal for turning the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82 on or off) from the game control microcomputer 100 for a normal electric accessory. And the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electrical components for rendering such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 performs all or part of the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all or one of the on / off operations in the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED. A control content for causing the electrical component for performance to execute a predetermined performance operation, such as a section, and a function of controlling the determined control content.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control that is provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12, the game effect lamp 9, LED for decoration, etc. A lamp driver circuit that performs on / off driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22 </ b> A and second start port switch 22 </ b> B), and a count switch 23 are transmitted to the main board 11. Wiring is connected. In addition, various switches should just have arbitrary structures which can detect the game ball | bowl as game media like what is called a sensor, for example. Further, the main board 11 is connected with wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control, such as the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like.

  FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100. The command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of an effect symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to variable display of the special symbol (each corresponding to the variation pattern XX). ). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the fluctuation patterns that can be used, which will be described later, there are fluctuation commands corresponding to the fluctuation patterns specified by the numbers. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of effect symbols.

  The command 8A01 (H) is an effect control command (first start prize opening designation command) for notifying that when a game ball enters the first start prize opening. Command 8A02 (H) is an effect control command (second start winning opening designation command) for notifying that when a game ball enters the second starting winning opening.

  The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C04 (H) are effect control commands indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. . The effect control CPU 120 determines the display result of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C04 (H), so the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C04 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands. Command 8C01 (H) (display result 1 designation command) designates a loss. Command 8C02 (H) (display result 2 designation command) designates 15R big hit and probability change. Command 8C03 (H) (display result 3 designation command) designates 15R big hit and uncertain change.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation start designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation start designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation start designation command and the second symbol variation start designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol identification command (or symbol variation start designation command).

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the effect symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control CPU 120 ends the variable display (variation display) of the effect symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started (at the time of initial setting). Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed (initial setting at the time of resumption). When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command. Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) that designates the start of fanfare (start of big hit gaming state) in the case of 15 rounds of big hit.

  In the big hit game state, the fanfare is executed first, and then the special big prize ball device 7 which is the big prize opening is opened (round game etc.), the main big hit game is executed, and the big hit game is executed. The ending is executed after the game. The fanfare is an effect that informs or suggests that the jackpot game state has started, that is, that the jackpot game will start. The ending is an effect of notifying that the big hit game state has ended, that is, that the big hit game has ended.

  The command A2XX (H) is an effect control command (specifying command for opening a special prize opening) that designates opening of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A3XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big prize opening) that designates closing of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  Command A601 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending designation command) that designates the start of ending.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) that designates that the gaming state is the normal state (normal gaming state). Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (time-short state designation command) for designating that the gaming state is a time-short (advantageous) state. The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (time reduction number designation command) for designating the remaining number of times of the time reduction (advantageous) state (how many times the time reduction state continues until the variable display is finished). “XX” in the command B1XX (H) indicates the remaining number of time-saving (advantageous) states.

  Command C0XX (H) is an effect control command (total reserved memory number designation command) for designating a total reserved memory number obtained by adding the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C0XX (H) indicates the total number of reserved memories. Command C1XX (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number designation command) for designating the first special figure reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C1XX (H) indicates the number of first special figure hold memory. Command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number designation command) for designating the second special figure reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C2XX (H) indicates the second special figure holding memory number.

The command C6XXH is an effect control command indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. As the determination result at the time of winning, the determination result (variation pattern type) of the determined value range of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. ) Is a variation category command (each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, as with the variation pattern command, when a unique number is assigned to each variation pattern that can be used, which will be described later, there is a command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by that number.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numerical data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 is provided, and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 is provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data in the RAM 102, temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores various fluctuation data in the RAM 102. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  Note that the one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 only needs to incorporate the RAM 102 in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101, the random number circuit 104, the I / O 105, and the like may be externally attached.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, for example, the random number circuit 104 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The random number used for controlling the progress of the game is also called a game random number. The game random number may be updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 104 or may be updated by software when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined computer program. May be. For example, the random counter provided in a predetermined area (game control counter setting unit or the like) of the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 or a random counter provided in an internal register separate from the RAM 102 indicates a predetermined random number value. The random number value may be updated by storing numerical data and the CPU 103 updating the stored value regularly or irregularly.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various selection data and table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 has table data constituting a plurality of command transmission tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11, and a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. The table data etc. which comprise are memorize | stored. In the RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100, various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are temporarily stored so as to be rewritable.

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation in accordance with a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, a RAM 122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 120, and an image display device. 5, a display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in FIG. 5, a random number circuit 124 that updates the numerical data indicating the random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120, and the I / O 125. And are installed.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 121, thereby executing the process of controlling the effect operation by the effect electrical component. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various variation data temporarily stored, the receiving control CPU 120 for receiving input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 to the outside of the effect control board 12 A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting image data to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, Wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting from the push sensor 35B an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the user's operation action has been detected is also connected. Furthermore, wiring for transmitting a predetermined drive command signal to the motor drive circuit 16 for driving the movable effect member motor 61 for operating the movable effect member 60 is also connected to the effect control board 12. .

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data configuring the determination tables, pattern data configuring various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered. The effect control pattern is, for example, from process data including effect control execution data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the effect control process timer determination value, an end code, and the like. It is configured. The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 stores various data used for controlling the effect operation.

  The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 generates various commands. For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines the contents to be displayed by the image display device 5 and outputs a display control command to the display control unit 123 according to the determination. The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120, and generates image data. For example, the display control unit 123 performs control for executing decorative display variable display and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. As an example, the display control unit 123 may include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like. The VDP may be a microprocessor for image processing called a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or more generally a DSP (Digital Signal Processor). The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. Any configuration may be used.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes, for example, an input port for capturing an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12. It is comprised including. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a command (sound effect signal) transmitted to the sound control board 13, and a command transmitted to the lamp control board 14 (Electric decoration signal), a command (drive control signal) transmitted to the motor drive circuit 16 and the like are output.

  With the configuration as described above, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5 via the display control unit 123. Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls the speakers 8L and 8R via the sound control board 13 to output sound, or turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 and decoration LEDs via the lamp control board 14. , Display an effect image on the display area of the image display device 5 via the display control unit 123, or drive the movable effect member motor 61 by driving the movable effect member motor 61 via the motor drive circuit 16. . In this way, effects and the like for exciting the game are executed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined game using a game ball as a game medium is performed, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a predetermined hitting ball is emitted based on a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) performed by a player on a hitting operation handle installed on the lower right side of the front surface of the housing of the pachinko gaming machine 1 A game ball as a game medium is launched toward a game area by a launch motor provided in the apparatus. When the game ball that has flowed down the game area enters the first start winning opening (first start area) formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A, the game ball is detected by the first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. Thus, the first start condition is established. Thereafter, a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state. Is done.

  Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening (second start area) formed in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. The second start condition is satisfied. Thereafter, a special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state. Is done. However, when the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the normal open state or closed state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening.

  Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 2, the normal symbol starting condition for executing the variable symbol display on the normal symbol display 20 is established. Thereafter, the normal symbol game 20 is started by the normal symbol display 20 based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting variable symbol normal display such as the end of the previous normal symbol game has been completed. In this ordinary game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the change of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed regular symbol, the variable symbol display result of the regular symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. Corresponding to the fact that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per standard”, the opening control and the expansion opening control are performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. When a predetermined time elapses, closing control or normal opening control for returning to the vertical position is performed. Whether or not the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is set as “predetermined per symbol” as the predetermined specific display result is determined when the normal symbol game is started by the normal symbol display 20 or the like. Is determined (predetermined) before derivation display.

  When a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started or when a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started, a special game is started. It is determined (predetermined) whether or not the variable display result of the symbol is to be a “big hit” as a predetermined specific display result before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and the effect control command for designating the variable display result and the variation pattern is the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 shown in FIG. To the effect control board 12.

  After the special figure game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses, a definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Is displayed. Corresponding to the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, decorations of “left”, “middle”, and “right” arranged on the screen of the image display device 5 In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a variable display of a decorative symbol (effect symbol) different from the special symbol is performed. In the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, a fixed special that results in variable display of the special symbol When the symbol is derived and displayed, a fixed decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed on the image display device 5.

  When a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a variable symbol display result of the special symbol, the variable symbol display result (special symbol display result) becomes a “big jackpot” (specific display result), which gives a value advantageous to the player. The big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state is controlled. That is, whether or not the game state is controlled to the big hit gaming state corresponds to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, and is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. When the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed as the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, and the loss symbol is derived and displayed, the variable symbol display result (special symbol display result) is “lost”.

  As an example, a special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” is a jackpot symbol, and a special symbol indicating a symbol “−” is a lose symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A may be different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. However, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening is in an open state, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in a first state advantageous to the player. Then, the special winning opening is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 second) or a period until a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls enter the special winning opening and a winning ball is generated. A round game (also simply referred to as “round”) is executed. During periods other than the execution period of such round games, the big prize opening is closed, and it is difficult or impossible to generate a winning ball. When a game ball enters the big prize opening, the winning ball is detected by the count switch 23, and a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball for each detection. The round game in the big hit game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, “15”) is reached.

  When the special figure display result is “big hit”, the case where the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probability change” is included. For example, as a result of variable display of special symbols, when a big hit symbol indicating the numbers “3” and “5” is derived and displayed, the big hit type becomes “non-probable change”, and the big hit symbol indicating the number “7” is derived and displayed. When it is made, the big hit type becomes “probability change”. When the jackpot type is “non-probability change” or “probability change”, as a round game in the big hit gaming state, the special variable winning ball device 7 is in a first state (a big winning opening is in an open state) advantageous to the player. A normal open round in which the upper limit time to be performed is a relatively long time (for example, 29 seconds) is executed. The big hit game state in which the normal open round is executed is also referred to as a normal open big hit state or a first specific game state.

  When the special figure display result is “big hit”, the case where the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probability change” is included. For example, as a result of variable display of a special symbol, when the big hit symbol indicating the number “3” is derived and displayed, the big hit type is “non-probable change”, and when the big hit symbol indicating the number “7” is derived and displayed, The type is “probable change”. When the jackpot type is “non-probability change” or “probability change”, as a round game in the big hit gaming state, the special variable winning ball device 7 is in a first state (a big winning opening is in an open state) advantageous to the player. A normal open round in which the upper limit time to be performed is a relatively long time (for example, 29 seconds) is executed.

  After the big hit gaming state is finished, the probability that the variable display result will be “big hit” (hit probability) is controlled to be a positive change state that is higher than the normal state based on the fact that the predetermined probability change control condition is satisfied. There is. The probability change state is controlled so as to continue until a predetermined probability change end condition such as the start of the next big hit gaming state is satisfied. In addition, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the average variable display time may be controlled to a short state when it becomes shorter than the normal state. The time-short state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state, and for example, the average variable display time is different. The short-time state is controlled to continue until one of the short-time end conditions is established first, among the fact that a predetermined number of variable displays have been executed and the next big hit gaming state has been started. . Note that the probability change state is controlled to continue until one of the probability change end conditions is satisfied first, between a predetermined number of variable displays being executed and the next big hit gaming state being started. You may be made to do.

  As an example, when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the gaming state becomes a short-time state. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “probability change”, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the gaming state becomes a time reduction state and a probability change state.

  In the short time state, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the first variable state (open state or expanded open state) and the second variable state (in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening than in the normal state. Closed or normally open). For example, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol change time (normal diagram change time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, or the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol in each normal symbol game is “general”. Tilt control time for controlling the tilt of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the probability of “per figure” is higher than that in the normal state, and the variable display result is “per figure”. By making the control longer than that in the normal state and increasing the number of tilts more than in the normal state, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is changed to the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode. Just do it. Note that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. Thus, the control for changing the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B between the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode is referred to as high opening control (also referred to as “time-short control” or “high base control”). Is done. By controlling in such a short time state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened, and a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is achieved.

  Note that the time-short state in which the high opening control is performed is also referred to as “high base state”, “high base”, and the like, and the game state that is not the time-short state is also referred to as “low base state”, “low base”, or the like. The probability variation state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as “high probability state”, “high probability”, and the like, and the gaming state that is not the probability variation state is also referred to as “low probability state”, “low probability”, or the like. The gaming state when in the probable change state and the short time state is also referred to as “high-accuracy high base state”, “high-accuracy high base”, or the like. The gaming state when the state is in the short-time state without being in the probable change state is also referred to as “low-accuracy base state”, “low-accuracy base”, or the like. The game state when the state is in the probabilistic state without being in the short-time state is also referred to as “highly accurate low base state”, “highly accurate low base”, or the like. The normal state which does not become either the short-time state or the probability variation state is also referred to as “low accuracy low base state”, “low accuracy low base” or the like.

  The game ball used as a game medium in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the recorded information of the score given corresponding to the number thereof have value that can be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes according to the quantity, for example. That's fine. Alternatively, these game balls and score recording information may not be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes, but may have valuable value that can be used for a second game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Further, the game value that can be given in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to paying out a game ball as a prize ball or giving a score. For example, the game value can be controlled to a big hit game state or a special game state such as a probable change state. Control, the upper limit of the number of round games that can be executed in the big hit gaming state becomes the first round number (for example, “15”) larger than the second round number (for example, “7”), and the game is executed in the short time state The upper limit number of possible variable displays becomes a first number (for example, “100”) larger than the second number (for example, “50”), and the big hit probability in the probability variation state is larger than the second probability (for example, 1/50). A high first probability (for example, 1/20), and the number of consecutive chunks, which is the number of times of repeated control in the big hit gaming state without being controlled in the normal state, is greater than the second consecutive number of chunks (eg, “5”). Many Such a part or all of it to be the first communication Chang number (e.g. "10"), it may include be a more favorable game situation for the player.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and In response to the start of any one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, the decorative symbol variable display is started. The period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R In the (variable display period), the decorative display variable display mode may be a predetermined reach mode.

  Here, the reach mode refers to a decorative design that has not yet been stopped when the decorative design that is stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination ("reach variation design"). Is also a display mode in which the variation continues, or a display mode in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) in advance. The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “medium”) that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped. In the symbol display area 5C, etc., the decorative pattern is fluctuating, or the decorative symbol is a big hit in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R This is a display mode in which all or a part of the combination is changed and changed in synchronization.

  Corresponding to the reach mode, the speed of variation of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Or changing the display mode of the background image, playing and displaying a moving image different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design, performing different rendering operations from before reaching the reach mode May be. Such effect operations such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the decorative pattern change mode are referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). The reach effect includes not only the display operation in the image display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like before reaching the reach mode. It may be included that the operation mode is different from the operation mode.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (effect modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, the possibility of being a “hit” (also referred to as “reliability” or “hit reliability”, “expectation” or “hit expectation”) differs depending on the production mode in each reach production. That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed. In this embodiment, as an example, reach effects such as normal, super A, super B, and super C are preset. The reach effects of Super A to C are reach effects in which a plurality of characters fight. Hereinafter, the reach production of super A to C will be referred to as super reach A to C, and the normal reach production may be referred to as normal reach.

  Super reach A to C are reach effects in which a plurality of characters fight. In the super reach A to C, for example, the fighting characters may be different, and each of the super reach A to C may be set to a different production mode. In Super A or B, when the predetermined character wins the battle, the variable display result is “big hit”, and when the predetermined character loses the battle, the variable display result is “lost”. When the super reach C is executed, the super reach A may be executed after the super reach C is executed (there may be developed to the super reach A). When the super reach C is executed but the super reach A is not developed (for example, when a predetermined character loses the battle), the variable display result is “lost”. On the other hand, when it develops to Super Reach A (for example, when a predetermined character wins the battle), the variable display result may be a “hit”.

  Depending on which reach production is executed, the variable display result of the variable display may be “big hit” (in this embodiment, the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change”). Expectation level of jackpot) changes. For example, the big hit expectation is higher when super reach A or B is executed than when normal reach is executed. In addition, among the super reach, when the super reach A (including the case of development from the super reach C) is executed, the big hit expectation is higher than when the super reach B is executed.

  The expectation degree of jackpot is, for example, (probability that the effect will be executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of being the jackpot) / {(the probability that the effect will be executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of being the big hit) + (other than the time of the big hit) (Probability that the effect is executed) × (probability of not winning the jackpot)} (when the big hit expectation is “1”, the variable display result is always “big hit”. Same for degrees).

  When the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game, is “big hit”, a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. As an example, a combination of big hits is confirmed by stopping and displaying the same decorative symbols on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is only necessary that the decorative design is derived and displayed.

  When the big hit type is “non-probable change”, a definite decorative symbol that is a non-probable big hit combination may be derived. For example, the symbol number that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 is “1”. Among the decorative symbols of “8”, any one of the decorative symbols having the even numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “middle”, “right”. The decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line, and may be a type of a fixed decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination. In this way, the decorative symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” constituting the non-probable big hit combination are referred to as non-probable variation symbols.

  When the jackpot type is “probable change”, a definite decorative symbol that is a non-probable variable big hit combination may be derived, or a definite decorative symbol that is a probable variable big hit combination may be derived. For example, the symbol numbers that are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are the fixed decorative symbols that are probable big hit combinations. Among the decorative patterns of “8”, any one of the decorative patterns whose pattern numbers are odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” is “left”, “middle”, “right”. The decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be stopped and displayed on a predetermined active line, and may be a type of a fixed decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination. In this way, the decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols.

  A re-lottery effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols in which the determined decorative symbol is a non-probabilistic big hit combination or a probable big hit combination. In the re-lottery effect, after the decorative symbols that are the non-probable big hit combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5, for example, “ In the left, middle, and right decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the same decorative pattern is changed again, and the decorative pattern (probable variable pattern) that is a combination of the probabilistic big hit and non-variable is displayed. One of the decorative symbols (non-probable variable symbols) that is a probable big hit combination is stopped and displayed as a final decorative symbol (final stop display). Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the confirmed decoration that becomes the non-probable big hit combination after re-variation of the temporarily stopped display decorative pattern A re-lottery selection effect for deriving and displaying symbols is performed. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the definite decoration that becomes the probable big hit combination after re-variation of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern A re-lottery winning effect that stops and displays a symbol may be executed, or a re-lottery winning effect may be executed.

  When the big hit type is “probable change”, the decorative symbol that is a non-probable variable big hit combination is displayed once during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the lottery effect is executed during the variable display, or the subsequent big hit gaming state A jackpot promotion promotion effect may be executed at the end of the middle or jackpot gaming state, and the start of control to be in a probable change state may be notified. The jackpot promotion effect is in the jackpot gaming state at the start of the jackpot gaming state, during the execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state, during the period from one of the rounds to the start of the next round in the jackpot gaming state Probability change notification is made as to whether or not to control to the probability change state in the period from the end of the final round to the start of the next variable display game. Note that a notification effect similar to the jackpot promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot promotion effect that is executed after the final round in the jackpot game state is particularly called “ending promotion effect”. These re-lottery effects and promotion effects during the big hit may not be executed, and the start of control to be in a probable change state may be notified.

  When the special figure display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is not the reach mode, and the decorative pattern constituting the predetermined non-reach combination is stopped and displayed. There are cases in which a definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, when the special figure display result is “losing”, the decorative symbols constituting a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as “reach-losing combination”) are stopped and displayed after the decorative display variable display mode becomes the reach mode. As a result, a definite decorative symbol that is a non-specific display result may be derived and displayed.

  Next, main operations (actions) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described.

  In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process.

  When the CPU 103 executing such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt disabled state and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt processing includes, for example, switch processing, main-side error processing, information output processing, gaming random number update processing, special symbol process processing, normal symbol process processing, command control processing, and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Processing for controlling the progress of the process is included.

  The switch processing is processing for determining the state of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110. The main-side error process is a process of performing an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and generating a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The information output process is a process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start-up information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software.

  As an example, the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side include a random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and a random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. It only has to be included (see FIG. 6). The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game is controlled as the big hit game state with “1”. Any of the values of “65535” can be taken. The random number MR2 for determining the big hit type is used to determine the big hit type as one of a plurality of types such as “non-probable change” or “probable change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. It is a random value and can take any value from “1” to “100”. The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance, and “1” to “251”. Can be any value.

  In the special symbol process included in the game control timer interrupt processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and displayed on the special symbol display device 4 Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of operations and opening / closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in a predetermined procedure. The normal symbol process process controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 20 to variably display the normal symbol, set the tilting operation of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, and the like. It is a process that enables.

  The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. As an example, in special symbol process processing and normal symbol process processing, transmission settings for control commands (such as effect control commands) are set for each command in advance in the command transmission table (ROM 101 in accordance with the effect control command to be transmitted). )) In the ROM 101 (for example, the value of the storage address is stored in a transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 102), and the command control process is provided in the RAM 102. Corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer (for example, the value indicating the storage address in the ROM 101), among the output ports included in the I / O 105, the effect control board 12 Sending a production control command After setting the control data in the output port for the output, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the production control INT signal, and the production control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time and then turned off. The effect control command based on the setting in the transmission table (the effect control command set for transmission) can be transmitted. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101.

  When the start winning determination process is started, the CPU 103 first determines the first start opening based on the detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. It is determined whether or not the switch 22A is on (step S201). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201; Yes), the first special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure is a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (for example, “4”) (step S202). At this time, the CPU 103 reads the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control counter setting unit), thereby It is sufficient if the number of memories can be specified. When the number of first special figure reserved storage is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), the start port that is the stored value of the start port buffer provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102 The buffer value is set to “1” (step S203).

  When the first start-up switch 22A is OFF in step S201 (step S201; No), or when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes), it is normal. It is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is on based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball apparatus 6B ( Step S204). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is ON (step S204; Yes), the second special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure is a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (for example, “4”) (step S205). At this time, the CPU 103 reads the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control counter setting unit), thereby It is sufficient if the number of memories can be specified. When the second special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value in step S205 (step S205; No), the start port buffer value is set to “2” (step S206). If the second start port switch 22B is not on (step S204; No), or if the second special figure reservation storage number is the upper limit (step S205; Yes), the start winning determination process is terminated.

  After executing one of the processes in steps S203 and S206, the pending storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S207). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is increased by 1 (incremented) when the game ball enters the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. ) To be updated. The second reserved memory count value is incremented by 1 (incremented) when a game ball enters the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special figure is satisfied. ) To be updated. At this time, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control counter setting unit), is updated to add 1 (step S208).

  After executing the process of step S208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (step S209). As an example, in the process of step S209, the random number circuit 104 or random data provided by a random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.) Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR1, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted. The numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored as reserved data by being set at the head of the empty entry in the special figure storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S210). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit as shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is “2”, the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit as shown in FIG.

  The first special figure storage unit shown in FIG. 7A is not started yet, although a game ball has entered the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and a first start winning has occurred. On-hold data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit associates with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the entry of the game ball The CPU 103 stores the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the like as the reserved data. Is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) is reached. The hold data stored in the first special figure holding storage unit in this way indicates that execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the first special figure is being held, and the variable display result ( It is possible to determine whether or not it is decided to control to the big hit gaming state based on the special figure display result), or whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a specific mode (for example, reach reach of super reach, etc.) This is reserved storage information.

  The second special figure storage unit shown in FIG. 7B is not yet started, although the game ball has entered the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the second start winning has occurred. The reserved data of the special game (not shown special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting winning opening, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the entry of the game ball The number data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, etc. extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 or the like is used as the reserved data. The data is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) is reached. The hold data stored in the second special figure holding storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure (variable display) is held, and the variable display result (in this special figure game) It is possible to determine whether or not it is decided to control to the big hit gaming state based on the special figure display result), or whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a specific mode (for example, reach reach of super reach, etc.) This is reserved storage information.

  Subsequent to the process of step S210, the CPU 103 performs a start winning determination process (step S211). The starting winning time determination process is a process for so-called prefetching. In this embodiment, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol display results (variable display results of special symbols) are obtained by special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 4, FIG. 9) described later. A determination is made as to whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as “big hit”. Further, in a variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 4 and FIG. 11) described later, determination of a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is performed.

  On the other hand, separately from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning determination process in step S211 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). , Judgment whether or not the special figure display result of the special figure game executed by the current start winning will be "big hit", and the variable display form of the decorative symbols executed by the current start winning is a display form with reach It is determined whether or not. As a result, the special symbol display result becomes “big hit” or the decorative symbol variable display mode before the variable symbol special symbol display based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started. The display mode with reach is predicted, and based on the prediction result, the effect control CPU 120 on the effect control board 12 side changes the color of the hold display and the color of the active display (change) It is possible to determine whether or not to execute (production). In this embodiment, the initial color of the hold display and the active display is white, and can be changed to blue, green, and red by executing the change effect. The color has stages corresponding to the degree of expectation of jackpot, and the order is white, blue, green, and red from the bottom to the top. The execution period of the change effect is set so as to be within a single variable display period. Specifically, the game state is a short time (advantageous) state, or a state in which the variable display period is shortened (shortening variation) in response to the number of special figure hold memories (hold number) being a predetermined number or more. Even when the variable display period is shortened, the execution period of the change effect is set to be within the variable display period.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning time determination process. For example, the CPU 103 first checks the state of a time reduction flag (a flag that is turned on when the time is short) or a probability change flag (a flag that is turned on when the probability change state) provided in a predetermined area in the RAM 102. The current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S401). The CPU 103 identifies that the probability variation state is on when the probability variation flag is on, identifies the time reduction state when the time reduction flag is on, and is in the normal state when both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off. What is necessary is just to specify.

  Following the processing of step S401, the CPU 103 selects a table prepared corresponding to the current gaming state from among a plurality of special figure display result determination tables prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance. Select and set to use table (step S402). A plurality of special figure display result determination tables are prepared depending on whether the gaming state is a probable change state or the like. In the special figure display result determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 10A, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result indicates that the special figure display result is “big hit”. It suffices if it is assigned to the determination result of “losing”.

  For example, as a special figure display result determination table, a special figure display result determination table (see FIG. 10A) corresponding to the non-probability change state and the probability change state is prepared. The CPU 103 sets a table corresponding to the current gaming state from the table to the use table by reading the table from the ROM 101 to the RAM 102.

  Thereafter, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S209 in FIG. 5 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step S403). In the big hit determination range, individual decision values assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” in the use table set in step S402 are set, and the CPU 103 compares the random number MR1 with each decision value one by one. By doing so, it is only necessary to determine whether or not there is a decision value that matches the random value MR1. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value included in the jackpot determination range is set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparing. At this time, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the big hit determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random value MR1 is determined as “big hit” (big hit start determination). .

  When it is determined in step S403 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S403; No), the CPU 103 displays a display result designation command (determination at the start winning prize) according to the case where the variable display result is “lost”. A transmission setting for transmitting “losing” as a display result among the results) to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S405).

  If it is determined in step S403 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S403; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S409). At this time, the CPU 103 refers to a jackpot type determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance. In the jackpot type determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 10B, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type indicates that the jackpot type is “non-probability change” and “probability change”. It suffices if it is assigned to the determination result of either one. The CPU 103 uses the jackpot type assigned to the determined value that matches the random number MR2 as the current determination result. A display control designation command (a command for designating “big hit” of “probability change” or “non-probability change” as the display result of the determination result at the time of starting winning) according to the determination result by the process of step S409 is performed. 12 is set for transmission (step S410).

  After executing any of the processes in steps S405 and S410, the CPU 103 transmits a variation category command (a command for designating a variation category in the determination result at the time of winning a start) to the effect control board 12. Is set (step S413).

  After step S413, the CPU 103 performs transmission setting of a start winning opening designation command (step S414). Here, the first start winning opening designation command is the effect control board 12 as the effect control information for notifying the increase in the number of first special figure hold memory when the first start condition is established by the occurrence of the first start prize. Sent to the other side. In addition, the second start winning opening designation command is used as the effect control information for notifying the increase in the number of the second special figure holding memory when the second start condition is established by the occurrence of the second start winning prize. Sent to the side. After step S414, the winning determination process ends.

  Returning again to FIG. Thereafter, the CPU 103 determines whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S212). At this time, if the start port buffer value is “2” (step S212; “2”), the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (step S213), and then the start winning prize is obtained. The determination process ends. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is “1” (step S212; “1”), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to “0” (step S214). The process proceeds to step S204. Thereby, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect the start winning of the game balls that are effective at the same time, the processing based on the detection of both effective start winnings can be completed reliably.

  After executing the start winning determination process at step S101 shown in FIG. Select one of these processes and execute it.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the first special symbol display unit 4A, the second special symbol reservation storage unit, the second special figure reservation storage unit, and the like are stored on the basis of the presence or absence of reserved data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. It is determined whether or not the special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is determined by the variable display result. Make a decision (predetermined) before being displayed. At this time, when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit”, the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types such as “non-probable change” or “probable change”. The data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type is stored in the jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, the game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102, whereby the jackpot type is stored. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol, the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B) One of the lost symbols) is set. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance.

  FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 4 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 9, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure holding storage number is “0” (step S231). The second special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. The CPU 103 only has to read the second reserved memory number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S231 (step S231; No), for example, the first area of the second special figure reservation storage unit (for example, the storage area corresponding to the reservation number “1”) The numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is read as the hold data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (step S232). As a result, the game random number extracted in response to the occurrence of the start prize (second start prize) at the second start prize port in the process of step S209 shown in FIG. 5 is read. The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting and updating the second reserved memory number count value by 1, etc., the second special figure reserved memory number is updated by 1 and the second special figure reserved memory is also updated. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S233). For example, the second special figure hold storage unit stores the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” (the storage area corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) one entry at a time. shift. Also, in the process of step S233, the total pending storage number (total pending storage number count value) is updated to be decremented by 1. Then, the variation special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, the game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102, is updated to “2” (step S234).

  When the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” in step S231 (step S231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (step S235). The first special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The CPU 103 only has to read the first reserved storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”. Thus, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure reserved memory number is “0”, and the first special figure reserved memory number is “0”. It is determined whether or not. Thereby, execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure.

  If the special game is executed in the order in which the game balls enter the start winning opening regardless of whether it is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the first starting winning opening And the starting opening data indicating which game ball has entered into the second starting winning opening is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 in association with the holding number together with the holding data or separately from the holding data, What is necessary is just to make it possible to specify the order in which the start conditions are established for the special game corresponding to each hold data.

  Subsequent to the process of step S236, for example, by updating the first reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating the first special figure reserved memory number, the first special figure reserved memory is updated. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S237). For example, the first special figure hold storage unit stores the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” (the storage area corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) one entry at a time. shift. Further, in the process of step S237, the total pending storage number (total pending storage number count value) is updated so as to be decremented by one. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S238).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S234 and S238, the special figure display result, which is the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, is determined as either “big hit” or “losing” (step S239). As an example, in the process of step S239, a special figure display result determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set as a use table for determining the special figure display result. In the special figure display result determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 10A, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result indicates that the special figure display result is “big hit”. The determination result of “losing” may be assigned according to the presence / absence of probability variation control in the probability variation state (whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state). The CPU 103 reads the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result included in the gaming random number temporarily stored in the random number buffer for variation in step S232 or S236 from the random number buffer for variation, and the gaming state is in the probabilistic state. By referring to the special figure display result determination table set in the use table based on whether or not there is and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1, depending on whether or not the gaming state is a probable change state What is necessary is just to determine either the determination result of "big hit" and "lack" assigned to the determination value applicable to numerical value MR1 as a special figure display result. The CPU 103 determines that the probability variation control is being performed when the probability variation flag (a flag that is turned on when the probability variation state) provided in a predetermined area (for example, the game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102 is in the on state. do it. For example, when the random value MR1 is “9000”, the CPU 103 determines that the special figure display result is “big hit” when the probability variation flag is on (when probability variation control is present), and the probability variation flag is If it is in the off state (when there is no probability variation control), it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost”.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, when the probability variation control is being performed in the probability variation state, the special figure display result is “ "Big hit" is decided. Therefore, for example, based on the jackpot end process in step S117 shown in FIG. 4 (described in detail later), the probability variation flag is set to the on state corresponding to the case where the jackpot type is “probability variation”, or the like. When the current state is a probability variation state in which probability variation control is performed, the special figure display result is more likely to be a “big hit” than when the probability variation control is not performed in the normal state or in the short time state, and the big hit gaming state is achieved. Prone.

  Thereafter, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined by the process of step S239 is “big hit” (step S240). When the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” (step S240; Yes), the big hit flag provided in a predetermined area (for example, the game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step S241). .

  Further, the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S242). As an example, in the process of step S242, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 5 prepared in advance by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 is selected and set in the use table for determining the jackpot type. In the jackpot type determination table, the result of determining whether the jackpot type is a plurality of types (“probability change” or “non-probability change”) according to the numerical value (determination value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (See FIG. 10B). The CPU 103 reads the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determining random number value MR2 included in the gaming random number temporarily stored in the random number buffer for variation in step S232 or S236 from the random number buffer for variation, and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type The jackpot type assigned to the decision value corresponding to the random value MR2 may be selected by referring to the decision table of the jackpot type set in the use table based on the numerical data indicating the above. For example, when the random value MR2 is “75”, the CPU 103 determines (selects) “probability variation” as the jackpot type.

  After executing the process of step S242, the big hit type is stored (step S243). The CPU 103 stores in the jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (for example, the game control buffer setting unit) a jackpot type buffer setting value indicating the determination result of the jackpot type (for example, as shown in FIG. In the case of “probable change”, the value of “0” is stored, and in the case of “probability change”, the value is “1”).

  When the special figure display result is not “big hit” in step S240 (step S240; No), or after executing the processing of steps S241 to S243, the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result of the special figure in the special figure game. Is determined (step S246). As an example, when it is determined in steps S240 and S244 that the special figure display result is not “big hit”, the special symbol predetermined as the lost symbol is determined as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S240 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, a plurality of types of big hits are made according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S242 (according to the big hit type buffer setting value). Any one of the special symbols predetermined as the symbols may be determined as the confirmed special symbol.

  After executing the process of step S246, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” (step S247), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” in step S247, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the variation pattern setting process in step S111 shown in FIG. 4 is executed.

  In step S235, when the number of reserved figures stored in the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (step S235; Yes), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step S248), the special symbol is set. Normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated. The effect control board 12 displays a demonstration screen when a customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 in FIG. 4 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a result of prior determination as to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”. Since the variation pattern designates the content (variable display mode) of the variable display of the decorative design, the content of the variable display of the decorative design is determined by this determination. The variable display time for special symbols and decorative symbols is set in advance corresponding to the variation pattern. Therefore, by determining the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process, the variable display time from the start of variable display of the special symbol to the deriving of the definite special symbol resulting in the variable display result is determined. In addition, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of determining whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach” when the variable display result is “losing”. Alternatively, even if it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is set to “reach” by determining the fluctuation pattern when the variable display result is “lost” in the fluctuation pattern setting process at a predetermined ratio. Good. Further, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of performing setting for starting the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 4. When the variation pattern setting process is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S111 of FIG. 4 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). If the big hit flag is ON (step S261; Yes), the variation pattern corresponding to the big hit when the special figure display result is “big hit” is determined (step S262).

  When the big hit flag is OFF in step S261, the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern corresponding to the loss when the special figure display result is “lost” (step S265).

  FIG. 12 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result (special drawing display result) is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” which does not become the reach mode, and the reach mode is “ In response to each of the cases of “reach”, the variable display result (special display result) is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change”, etc. A variation pattern is prepared in advance.

  In this embodiment, the variable display result is “losing” and “non-reach” is specified as the variation pattern. Patterns PB1-1 and PB1-2 are prepared.

  Further, there are prepared variation patterns corresponding to the contents depending on whether the variable display result is “big hit” (“big hit” in which the big hit type is “probability change” or “non-probability change”) or “losing”. Specifically, a fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (for losing) and a fluctuation pattern PA3-1 ("big hit") that specify execution of normal reach are prepared. In addition, a fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (for loss) and a fluctuation pattern PA3-2 ("big hit") that designate execution of super reach A are prepared. In addition, a fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (for loss) and a fluctuation pattern PA3-3 ("big hit") that designate execution of super reach B are prepared. In addition, a fluctuation pattern PA2-4 (for loss) and a fluctuation pattern PA3-4 ("big hit") are prepared which specify that super reach C is executed and then developed into super reach A.

  In the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 11, for example, the big hit fluctuation pattern is determined using the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. As an example, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination is common in both cases where the jackpot type is “non-probability variation” or “probability variation”. It is only necessary to be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern.

  The CPU 103 refers to the jackpot variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination random value MR3 read from the variation random number buffer, and thereby the variation assigned to the determination value corresponding to the random value MR3. The pattern may be determined (selected) as the variation pattern used this time. For example, when the random value MR3 is “140”, the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern PA3-3.

  In the process of step S265 shown in FIG. 11, the loss variation pattern prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the game state is the normal state and the case where the game state is the time-short state and the time-short control is performed. A variation pattern at the time of losing is determined using the determination table. For example, whether the time is short or not is specified by whether or not a time-short flag (a flag that is turned on when the time is short) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (for example, a game control flag setting unit) is on. If the time reduction is not in progress (when the time reduction flag is OFF), the loss fluctuation pattern is determined using the loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. On the other hand, during the time reduction (when the time reduction flag is in the ON state), the fluctuation pattern at the time of the loss is determined using the loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG.

  In each loss variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination is assigned to the variation pattern determination result in accordance with the first special figure reserved storage number, and the second special diagram A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern in accordance with the reserved storage number. Instead of assigning a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern to the variation pattern determination result in accordance with the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number, the total reserved memory number Accordingly, a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The total reserved memory number may be specified from, for example, the total reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter, the total value of the first reserved memory number count value and the second reserved memory number count value, or the like. .

  The CPU 103 determines whether the normal time and the short time are based on whether the time is short, based on the total pending storage count value and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern read from the random number buffer for variation. By referring to any of the loss variation pattern determination tables according to the case, when the total number of reserved memories is not in the shortage, “0” to “1”, “2” to “4”, “5” to “8” The change pattern assigned to the decision value corresponding to the random number MR3 according to which one of “0”, “1”, and “2” to “8” corresponds to which May be determined (selected) as the variation pattern used this time.

  For example, when the time reduction flag is on and the random number value MR3 is “229”, the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern PA2-1 when the total reserved memory count value is “0”, and the total hold When the stored number count value is “1”, the variation pattern PB1-1 is selected, and when the total reserved storage number count value is any of “3” to “8”, the variation pattern PB1-2 is selected.

  After executing one of the processes in steps S262 and S265 shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 sets a special figure change time which is a variable symbol display time (step S266). The special figure change time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the change of the special symbol in the special figure game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special display result) is derived and displayed. It is. As shown in FIG. 12, the special figure fluctuation time is determined in advance corresponding to a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. The CPU 103 can set the timing at which a special symbol or decorative symbol variable display result is derived by setting a special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the processes of steps S262 and S265.

  Subsequent to the process of step S266, the CPU 103 performs a special game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and a special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. Among these, setting for starting the change of the special symbol is performed so as to start one of the special game in which the start condition is satisfied (step S267). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed. When the CPU 103 starts variable display using the first special figure, the CPU 103 controls the first hold indicator 25A to display the first special figure hold memory number subtracted by 1 from the first display. You may make it carry out to the hold | maintain indicator 25A (for example, reduce the number of lighting of LED by 1). When starting the variable display using the second special figure, the CPU 103 controls the second hold indicator 25B to display the second special figure hold memory number subtracted by one for the second display. You may make it carry out to the holding | maintenance indicator 25B (for example, reduce the number of lighting of LED by 1).

  After executing the process of step S267, command transmission setting is performed at the start of the special symbol fluctuation (step S268). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sends a first symbol variation start designation command, a variation pattern command, a display result designation command, a first result to the effect control board 12 from the main board 11. Transmission setting for sequentially transmitting the reserved memory number designation command is performed. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sends a second symbol variation start designation command, a variation pattern command, a display result designation command, a second display command to the effect control board 12 from the main board 11. Transmission setting for sequentially transmitting the reserved memory number designation command is performed. The set command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example, by executing the above-described command control process after the special symbol process process is completed. The first symbol variation start designation command and the second symbol variation start designation command here are transmitted as hold notification information for designating which of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number has decreased. Is done.

  After executing the process of step S268, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” (step S269), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” in step S269, when the next timer interruption occurs, the special symbol variation process in step S112 shown in FIG. 4 is executed.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 of FIG. 4 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol variation process includes a process of changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, a process of measuring an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to change, and the like. It is included. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the special symbol variation is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The fixed special symbol (the fixed special symbol set in step S110), which is the variable display result of the symbol, is stopped (displayed), and when the symbol is stopped, the special symbol is stopped (displayed and displayed). The symbol determination designation command, which is an effect control command for notifying the user, is also set for transmission, and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”. The symbol setting designation command that is set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the above-described command control process after the special symbol process is completed, for example. By repeatedly executing step S112, special symbol variable display, fixed special symbol derivation display, and the like are realized.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 of FIG. 4 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. The special symbol stop process includes a process for determining whether or not the big hit flag is turned on, and when the big hit flag is turned on, the time reduction flag and the probability variation flag are turned off, and a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting) Etc.), the count value of the short-time counter that counts the remaining number of variable displays executed during short-time control is set to “0”, corresponding to the start time of the big hit start stage (corresponding to the start of the big hit game state) Is a waiting time until the execution of the production is started, and is a predetermined time.) Is set, and the start of hitting to specify the start of the big hit gaming state based on the special figure display result is “big hit” Processing to set transmission of a designated command (production control command) and update the special figure process flag to “4” is included. Further, the special symbol stop process includes a process of updating the value of the special figure process flag to “0” when the big hit flag is not in the on state.

  The command set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the above-described command control process after the special symbol process process is completed, for example.

  Through a series of these processes, the time-saving state and the probability changing state are temporarily ended at the time of big hit, and the remaining variable display that can be executed during the time reduction is reduced by “once” at the time of a loss. When the remaining variable display that can be executed during the time reduction becomes “0” times, the time reduction flag is turned off and the time reduction state is terminated. That is, the time reduction state (time reduction control) is terminated when variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (the following initial count value) before the variable display result becomes “big hit” from the start. Further, when there is a change in the gaming state, notification of the changed gaming state is made to the effect control board 12 side.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 of FIG. 4 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit release pre-processing includes the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” and the start timing of the round game (for example, the big hit start time waiting time set above has elapsed). ) And the like, the processing for starting the execution of the round game in the big hit gaming state and opening the big winning opening, and the processing for starting the measurement of the elapsed time after the opening state is included. In this process, for example, corresponding to whether the jackpot type is “non-probable change” or “probability change” (which can be specified by the jackpot type buffer setting value stored in the jackpot type buffer), the big winning opening is opened. The upper limit of the period may be set. As an example, the normal opening round is executed by setting the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened to “29 seconds” corresponding to “non-probability change” or “probability change” for the big hit type. do it. When the process for opening the special winning opening is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. By repeating step S114, waiting until the start timing of the round game, opening of the big prize opening, and the like are realized.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In the big hit opening process, the winning prize opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. For determining whether or not the time has come to return from the open state to the closed state (or may be in a partially open state), and the timing to return the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state (of the game ball A process of returning the special winning opening to the closed state when it is determined that the number reaches a predetermined number (for example, nine) or the elapsed time reaches the upper limit period set in step S114) , Processing for starting measurement of the elapsed time since returning to the closed state is included. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”. By repeatedly performing step S115, the open state of the special winning opening is maintained until the timing for returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. After the big hit opening process, a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round game in which the big winning opening is in an open state has reached a predetermined upper limit number, or when the upper limit number has not been reached, Processing to measure the elapsed time since returning to the closed state is included. When the next round game is started, for example, when the measured elapsed time is the time when the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4” (in this case) Is a control command for notifying that the big hit gaming state has ended when the number of round games has reached the upper limit number of times, for example, in the process of step S114. A setting is made to transmit a jackpot end designation command, and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”. The command set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the above-described command control process after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. By repeatedly performing step S116, waiting is performed until the special winning opening is again opened.

  By repeatedly executing steps S114 to S116, the big hit gaming state is realized.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. After the big hit opening process, a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round game in which the big winning opening is in an open state has reached a predetermined upper limit number, or when the upper limit number has not been reached, Processing to measure the elapsed time since returning to the closed state is included. When the next round game is started, for example, when the measured elapsed time is the time when the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4” (in this case) Is a control command for notifying that the big hit gaming state has ended when the number of round games has reached the upper limit number of times, for example, in the process of step S114. A setting is made to transmit a jackpot end designation command, and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”. The command set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the above-described command control process after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. By repeatedly performing step S116, waiting is performed until the special winning opening is again opened.

  The time-short state (time-short control) ends only when the next jackpot gaming state is started out of a predetermined number of variable displays being executed and the next jackpot gaming state being started. Also good. In this case, it is not necessary to set the initial count value or the short-time count counter itself.

  Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute a predetermined effect control main process. When the production control main process is started, the production control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process, clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and CTC (counter / timer mounted on the production control board 12). Circuit) register setting, etc. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a timer interrupt flag provided in a predetermined area (for example, an effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122 is turned on. The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, the process waits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal serving as an effect control command is captured from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on, the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off, and command analysis processing is executed. In the command analysis processing, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process, the effect control process is executed. In the effect control process, for example, various effects such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, and the like. With respect to the control content of the rendering operation using the apparatus, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 are performed. Subsequent to the effect control process, an effect random number update process is performed, and numerical data indicating the effect random numbers counted by the random counter in the RAM 122 is updated by software as various random values used for effect control.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 15, first, the effect control CPU 120 performs a winning process (step S160). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect process flag to “0” in accordance with the value of the effect process flag (initially “0”) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit). Is variable display start waiting processing (step S170), variable display start setting processing (step S171) is "1", variable display effect processing (step S172) is "2". , “3” is a waiting process per special figure (step S 173), “4” is a special winning opening normal opening process (step S 174), and “5” is an ending effect process. (Step S175) is selected and executed.

  First, the winning process in step S160 will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the winning process executed in step S160 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 16, first, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the command (command at the time of winning) transmitted in the starting winning determination processing of FIG. 8 on the main board 11 has been input (step S600). ).

  Here, the command at the time of winning is, among the commands shown in FIG. 3, a start winning port designation command (one of the first start winning port designation command and the second start winning port designation command) and a display result designation command ( A display result 1 designation command, a display result 2 designation command, or a display result 3 designation command), and a variation category command. The effect control CPU 120 can recognize the start prize by the start winning opening designation command, and the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the winning determination result corresponding to the start prize is a big hit by the display result designation command. Can be recognized. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize a variable display variation pattern (whether it is super reach, etc.) corresponding to the start winning prize by the variation category command.

  If no winning command has been input (step S600; No), the winning process ends. On the other hand, when a command at the time of winning is input (step S600; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is what number is the new hold corresponding to the command at the time of winning determined to be input in step S600. The color change pattern indicating the color change mode for the new hold is determined according to the hold order indicating the change and the change pattern indicated by the change category command determined to have been input in step S600 (step S601). .

  17 to 19 are diagrams illustrating an example of the selection ratio of the color change pattern according to the hold order and the variation pattern. FIG. 17A shows the selection ratio of the color change pattern corresponding to the variation pattern when the holding order is 1. When the hold order is 1, a color in which the active display changes from white, which is the initial color, to blue, green, or red at the timing when the variable display for the corresponding hold is executed and the active display is performed The selection ratio between the change pattern (C1-1 to C1-3) and the case of no change is set. For example, the color change pattern C1-2 is a color change pattern in which the active display changes from white to green at the timing when the variable display for the corresponding hold is executed and the active display is performed.

  FIG. 17B shows the selection ratio of the color change pattern according to the variation pattern when the holding order is 2. When the holding order is 2, at least one of the holding display at the timing when the holding order of the corresponding holding becomes 1 and the active display at the timing when the variable display about the corresponding holding is executed and the active display is performed. A selection ratio is set between a color change pattern (C2-1 to C2-9) in which the color changes to any of blue, green, and red and no change. For example, in the color change pattern C2-2, the hold display remains white at the timing when the corresponding hold order of the hold becomes 1, and the color change pattern C2-2 is active when the variable display for the corresponding hold is executed and the active display is performed. This is a color change pattern in which the display changes from white to green (becomes timing of color change).

  FIG. 18 shows the selection ratio of the color change pattern according to the variation pattern when the holding order is 3. When the hold order is 3, the hold display at the timing when the corresponding hold order is 2, the hold display when the corresponding hold order is 1, and the variable display about the corresponding hold are executed. The color change pattern (C3-1 to C3-19) in which at least one of the active display at the timing when the active display is performed changes to blue, green, or red, and the case of no change are selected. A percentage is set. For example, in the color change pattern C3-8, the hold display remains white when the corresponding hold order becomes 2, and the hold display changes from white to green when the corresponding hold order becomes 1. In the color change pattern, the active display changes from green to red (the color change timing) when the variable display for the corresponding hold is executed and the active display is performed is there.

  FIG. 19 shows the selection ratio of the color change pattern according to the variation pattern when the holding order is 4 or more. When the holding order is 4, the holding display at the timing when the corresponding holding order is 3, the holding display at the timing when the corresponding holding order is 2, and the corresponding holding order is 1. A color change pattern (C4) in which at least one of the hold display at the timing and the active display at the timing at which the variable display for the corresponding hold is executed and the active display is performed changes to one of blue, green, and red -1 to C4-34) and a selection ratio between the case where the color is white as the initial color and no change is set. For example, in the color change pattern C4-18, the hold display remains white at the timing when the corresponding hold hold order becomes 3, and the hold display changes from white to green at the timing when the corresponding hold hold order becomes 2. Change (becomes color change timing), the hold display changes from green to red at the timing when the corresponding hold order is 1, and the variable display for the corresponding hold is executed. The color change pattern in which the active display remains red at the timing when the active display is performed.

  Further, in the selection ratio of the color change pattern according to the hold order and the change pattern shown in FIGS. 17 to 19, the change pattern corresponding to the new hold corresponding to the command at the time of winning determined to be input in step S600, In other words, the variation category command determined to have been input in step S600 is any one of the variation pattern of the super reach big hit, the variation pattern of the normal reach big hit, the variation pattern of the super reach loss, the variation pattern of the normal reach loss, the variation pattern of the non-reach loss. The selection ratio of the color change pattern differs depending on whether or not it exists.

  Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the rate at which one of the color change patterns is selected, that is, the rate at which a change effect is executed and changed from white is higher than in the case of a loss. Also, in the case of big hits, comparing the ratio of remaining white, the ratio of finally blue, the ratio of finally green, and the ratio of finally red, The ratio remains white, finally becomes blue, finally becomes green, and finally becomes red. On the other hand, in the case of losing, when comparing the ratio of remaining white, the ratio of finally becoming blue, the ratio of finally becoming green, and the ratio of finally becoming red, It is the ratio that finally becomes red, the ratio that finally becomes green, the ratio that finally becomes blue, and the ratio that remains white. That is, the expectation of winning a big hit is highest when it finally becomes red, then it is highest when it finally becomes green, then it is high when it finally becomes blue, and it remains white Is the lowest. The information on the selection ratio of the color change pattern according to the hold order and the variation pattern shown in FIGS. 17 to 19 is stored in the RAM 122, for example.

  In step S601, the effect control CPU 120 recognizes a new hold order corresponding to the winning command determined to have been input in step S600. For example, the RAM 122 is set with a reserved memory number count value indicating the current special figure reserved memory number (hold number). The effect control CPU 120 increases the value every time the first start winning port designation command or the second start winning port designation command is inputted, and the first symbol variation start designation command or the second symbol variation start designation command is inputted. A process of decreasing by 1 is performed every time. Therefore, the reserved memory number count value indicates the current special figure reserved memory number, and what number is the new hold corresponding to the command at the time of winning determined to be input in step S600 (holding order) Will be shown.

  After recognizing a new hold order corresponding to the command at the time of winning determined to be input in step S600, the effect control CPU 120 changes the color change patterns shown in FIGS. 17 to 19 according to the hold order. Select one of the selection ratios. Further, the effect control CPU 120 uses the selection ratio of the selected color change pattern, and the change category command determined to have been input in step S600 is the change pattern of the super reach big hit, the change pattern of the normal reach big hit, the change pattern of the super reach lose. The color change pattern is determined according to whether the change pattern is a normal reach loss variation pattern or a non-reach loss variation pattern.

  Again, referring back to FIG. Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a color change by the determination in step S601, in other words, whether or not a color change pattern other than no change has been determined (step S602). When there is a color change (step S602; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets hold information including the color change pattern determined in step S601 (step S603). FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating an example of the hold information. The hold information is stored in the RAM 122, for example. As the hold information, for each hold storage (hold) corresponding to the start win, hold order information indicating the number of the hold corresponding to the start win from the oldest hold is set. Furthermore, when the color change pattern is determined in step S601, in step S603, the effect control CPU 120 adds the color change pattern information to the corresponding hold order information.

  Again, referring back to FIG. When there is no color change (step S602; No), the effect control CPU 120 sets hold information without a color change pattern, that is, hold information including only hold order information (step S604).

  After the hold information including the color change pattern is set in step S603, or after the hold information without the color change pattern is set in step S604, the effect control CPU 120 creates a new hold whose color is white. Display is performed (step S605). Here, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a new hold display whose color is white according to the hold order indicated by the hold information newly set in step S603 or step S604. Is output. Based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120, the display control unit 123 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 to generate image data, and creates a new on-hold display image whose color is white. The image is displayed on the image display device 5.

  Again, referring back to FIG. After the winning process in step S160, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S170 to S175 according to the value of the effect process flag.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. The variable display start waiting process starts variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 based on whether the first symbol variation start designation command or the second symbol variation start designation command from the main board 11 is received. It includes a process for determining whether or not to do so. When the first symbol variation start designation command or the second symbol variation start designation command is received and it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbols on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”. Is done.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the decorative symbols in the image display device 5 In order to perform various display operations and other various presentation operations, it includes a process of determining a definite decorative pattern and various presentation control patterns according to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the type of display result, and the like. The variable display start setting process ends when the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S171 in FIG. 15 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 21, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the special figure display result is “lost” based on, for example, a display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11 or the like. Determination is made (step S521). When it is determined that the special figure display result is “losing” (step S521; Yes), for example, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main board 11 has a variable display mode of the decorative design. It is determined whether or not the non-reach variation pattern corresponds to the case of “non-reach” which is not the reach mode (step S522).

  If it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; Yes), the production control CPU 120 determines a combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination ( Step S523). As an example, in the process of step S523, the effect control CPU 120 first determines the left fixed symbol updated by the effect random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area (for example, effect control counter setting unit) of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122. The numerical data indicating the random number value for use is extracted, and the “left” in the display area of the image display device 5 in the display pattern of the image display device 5 by referring to the left fixed symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121. The left fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5L is determined. Next, numerical value data indicating a random number value for determining the right determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter is extracted, and the right determined symbol determining table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 is referred to. For example, the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the production random counter is extracted, and the medium fixed symbol determination table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 is referred to. From the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined.

  In addition, the CPU 120 for effect control may vary the probability of determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol as the pending change symbol depending on the reach state, the big hit, the game state such as the loss. For example, the production control CPU 120 determines the medium-decorated decorative symbol as a pending change symbol with a probability of 50% in the case of super reach and lose, and the medium finalized ornament symbol with a probability of 70% in the case of super reach and a big hit. May be determined as a pending change symbol. In addition, the production control CPU 120 may determine which variable display is to be used as the reserved change symbol for the medium-decorated decorative symbol. For example, for each number of stored memories, a table is prepared for determining which variable display is to be used as a medium-decorated decorative symbol as a pending change symbol. The effect control CPU 120 refers to a table corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and determines which variable display is to use the medium-decorated decorative symbol as the pending change symbol. For example, when the number of reserved memories is 4, when it is determined that the middle-decorated decorative symbol is to be a reserved change symbol, one variable display when the reserved memory is digested, two variable when the reserved memory is digested Display, variable display when three reserved memories are consumed, timing when one of the reserved memories is digested and variable display when two reserved memories are consumed, etc. Is determined.

  When it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; No), a combination of a confirmed decorative symbol that is a final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined (step S524). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating random values for determining left and right determined symbols updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter is extracted, and the left and right prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 are prepared. By referring to the fixed symbol determination table, the symbol numbers that are stopped and displayed together in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols. Determine the same decorative design. Further, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or a random counter for production is extracted, and a medium fixed symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to. As a result, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value (For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not the jackpot combination but the reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S521 that the special figure display result is not “losing” (step S521; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbol constituting the jackpot combination. (Step S527). As an example, in the process of step S527, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the jackpot determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter is extracted. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot determined symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 are provided. A decorative symbol having the same symbol number that is stopped and displayed along with 5C and 5R is determined. At this time, for example, the same decorative design is determined according to the jackpot type specified by the display result designation command or the like.

  The information of the mode and stop order of the left determined decorative symbol, the right determined decorative symbol, the middle determined decorative symbol set in steps S523, S524, and S527 is stored in the RAM 122, for example.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S523, S524, and S527, the effect control CPU 120 performs a change effect setting process (step S528).

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the change effect setting process executed in step S528 of FIG. First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the color of the active display changes in the current variation (variable display) (step S700).

  Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a color change pattern is set in the hold information. When the color change pattern is set in the hold information, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hold order of the hold information in which the color change pattern is set is 1. When the hold order of the hold information for which the color change pattern is set is 1, the effect control CPU 120 determines the timing indicated by the hold order 0 obtained by subtracting 1 from the recognized hold order and the color change indicated by the color change pattern. It is determined whether or not the timing matches. For example, when the hold order indicated by the hold order obtained by subtracting 1 from the recognized hold order is the hold order 0, and the color change timing indicated by the color change pattern is the hold order 0 timing (active display timing), Both agree.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines that the timing indicated by the hold rank 0 obtained by subtracting 1 from the recognized hold rank and the timing of the color change indicated by the color change pattern are the hold rank 0 timing. If it is determined that the color of the active display changes due to the fluctuation, and it does not match, it is determined that the color of the active display does not change due to the current fluctuation.

  When the color of the active display changes in the current variation (step S700; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is an active change effect that is an effect of changing the color of the active display, which is executed inside the active character area 5HB. To determine the active change effect pattern for executing (step S701). In the present embodiment, the active change effect is always executed using the A character. Information on the active change effect pattern is stored in the RAM 122, for example.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the color of the hold display changes in the current variation (variable display) (step S702).

  Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a color change pattern is set in the hold information. When the color change pattern is set in the hold information, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hold order of the hold information in which the color change pattern is set is 2 or more. When the hold order of the hold information for which the color change pattern is set is 2 or more, the effect control CPU 120 determines the timing indicated by the hold order obtained by subtracting 1 from the recognized hold order and the color change indicated by the color change pattern. It is determined whether or not the timing matches. For example, when the hold order indicated by the hold order obtained by subtracting 1 from the recognized hold order is the hold order 1, and the color change timing indicated by the color change pattern is the hold order 1, the two match. The case where the hold information is set as shown in FIG. 20 will be described as an example. The hold order indicated by the hold rank obtained by subtracting 1 from the hold rank 4 of the hold information for which the color change pattern is set is the hold rank 3. The color change timing indicated by the color change pattern C4-33 is the timing of the holding orders 3 and 2 with reference to FIG. For this reason, the timing indicated by the hold order obtained by subtracting 1 from the hold order coincides with the color change timing indicated by the color change pattern.

  When the timing indicated by the hold order obtained by subtracting 1 from the recognized hold order matches the timing of the color change indicated by the color change pattern, the effect control CPU 120 changes the color of the hold display in the current variation. If it does not match, it is determined that the color of the hold display does not change in the current variation.

  When the color of the hold display changes in the current variation (step S702; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 then performs a hold change effect that is an effect of changing the color of the hold display executed in the hold area 5HA. Then, a hold change effect pattern for executing a hold change effect in which the A character is not used is determined (step S703). In the present embodiment, the pending change effect includes an aspect in which the A character is used, an aspect in which the B character is used, and an aspect in which the A character and the B character are not used. In step S <b> 703, the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold change effect of any of the three modes of the change change effect using the B character and the mode of not using the A character and the B character. A hold change effect pattern is determined. Information on the pending change effect pattern is stored in the RAM 122, for example.

  On the other hand, when the active display color does not change in the current variation (step S700; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the hold display color changes in the current variation (variable display) (step S700). S704). Specific processing is the same as that in step S702.

  When the color of the hold display changes in the current variation (step S704; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 then performs a hold change effect that is an effect of changing the color of the hold display executed in the hold area 5HA. Is determined to execute the hold change effect pattern (step S705). In step S705, unlike in the case of step S703 described above, the effect control CPU 120 uses any one of a mode using the A character, a mode using the B character, and a mode not using the A character and the B character. A hold change effect pattern for executing the hold change effect can be determined.

  Next, in step S705, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hold change effect pattern for executing the hold change effect in a mode of using the A character is determined (step S706).

  When the on-hold change effect pattern for executing the on-hold change effect in the form using the A character has not been determined (step S706; No), or when the color of the hold display does not change due to the current variation (step S704; No) Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a character effect setting process that is an effect using the character (step S707).

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the character effect setting process executed in step S707 of FIG. First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a character effect (step S800).

  For example, the determination ratio of whether or not the character effect is executed is determined according to the current color of the active display as shown in FIG. The effect control CPU 120 determines that the current color of the active display is white when the color change pattern is not set in the hold information of the hold order 1 among the hold information. On the other hand, when a color change pattern is set in the hold information of the hold order 1 among the hold information, the effect control CPU 120 displays the current active display based on the color change mode indicated by the color change pattern. Determine the color. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the character effect at an execution ratio corresponding to the current color of the active display shown in FIG.

  Again, referring back to FIG. Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the character effect is determined in step S800 (step S801).

  If execution of the character effect is determined (step S801; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of character effect (step S802).

  For example, as the type of character effect, as shown in FIG. 25, an explanation effect and the expected change expectation effect are prepared. The explanation effect is an effect in which the A character appears and makes various explanations in the game, and the change expectation suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the expectation degree of the big hit in the current change when the A character appears. is there. In FIG. 25, depending on whether the variation category command indicating the variation pattern corresponding to the current variation is a non-reach loss variation pattern, a normal reach loss variation pattern, a super reach loss variation pattern, or a jackpot variation pattern. The determination ratio of the explanation effect and the change expectation suggestion effect is different. Here, the expectation level of the jackpot by the player gradually increases in the order of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach. In FIG. 25, as the expectation level that is a big hit increases, the rate at which the explanation effect is determined decreases, and the rate at which the expected change level suggestion effect is determined increases. The effect control CPU 120 determines either the explanation effect or the expected change degree suggestion effect at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 25 based on the change category command indicating the change pattern corresponding to the current change. Information on the determined character effect type is stored in, for example, the RAM 122.

  In the character effect, when a plurality of images are displayed on the image display device 5 in an overlapping manner, the display of the front side (front side) image is changed to the display of the back side image due to the overlap (overlap) of the images. In order to prevent the player from recognizing or misrecognizing the contents of the effect, at least a part of the overlapping portion in the near side image may be in a transparent state (transparent state). For example, when an explanation effect or a change expectation suggestion effect is executed, a part of the explanation effect image that is an image used for the explanation effect or a change expectation suggestion effect image that is an image used for the change expectation suggestion effect Some may overlap with other images (for example, decorative designs, hold display, images displayed in the active character area 5HB, etc.), but if they overlap, recognition and confirmation of the contents of other images Therefore, a part of the explanation effect image or a part of the change expectation suggestion effect image may be in a transparent state.

  Again, referring back to FIG. Next, in step S202, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the change expectation suggesting effect has been determined as the character effect type (step S803).

When the change expectation suggestion effect is determined (step S803; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the display type of the character displayed in the change expectation suggestion effect (step S804).
For example, a plurality of character display types are prepared. In FIG. 26, five types of “!?”, “Reach”, “chance”, “SP”, and “premier” are prepared. Yes. In FIG. 26, the variation category command indicating the variation pattern corresponding to the current variation is a non-reach loss variation pattern, a normal reach loss variation pattern, a super reach loss variation pattern, or a big hit variation pattern. That is, the determination ratio of the character display type differs depending on the degree of expectation of the jackpot. Specifically, the determination ratios of the character display types are different so that “!?”, “Reach”, “chance”, “SP”, and “premier” are in descending order of the expectation of jackpot. The effect control CPU 120 determines one of a plurality of character display types at a determination ratio shown in FIG. 26 based on a change category command indicating a change pattern corresponding to the current change. Information on the determined character display type is stored in the RAM 122, for example.

  Again, referring back to FIG. After determining the character display type in step S804, if it is determined in step S803 that the change expectation suggesting effect has not been determined (step S803; No), execution of the character effect is not determined in step S801. Is determined (step S801; No), the character effect setting process ends.

  Returning again to FIG. After the character effect setting process in step S707, if it is determined in step S702 that there is no change in the color of the hold display due to the current change (step S702; No), the hold change effect in which the A character is not used in step S703. After determining the on-hold change effect pattern for executing, in step S706, when it is determined that the on-hold change effect pattern for executing the on-hold change effect pattern in which the A character is used is determined (step S706; Yes). The effect control CPU 120 deletes the hold information whose hold order is 1 and moves up the remaining hold information (step S708). As a result, the hold ranks of 2 and higher are each incremented by one. Thereafter, the changing time effect setting process ends.

  Returning again to FIG. After the change effect setting process in step S528, the effect control CPU 120 performs another notice effect setting process (step S528a). The other notice effect is an effect different from the above-described active change, hold change effect, and character effect, and is an effect for suggesting whether or not it is a big hit.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect pattern setting processing in accordance with the setting of various effects including the effect setting processing at the time of change in step S528 and other notice effect setting processing in step S528a (step S529).

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern to be used later, from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance, based on the effect pattern set in step S529 (step S530).

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets an initial value of an effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (such as an effect control timer setting unit) of the RAM 122 in accordance with, for example, the change pattern specified by the change pattern command. (Step S531).

  Then, the CPU 120 for effect control performs setting for starting the variation of the decorative design or the like in the image display device 5 (step S532). At this time, for example, the display control command designated by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined as the usage pattern in step S531 is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” provided in the display area.

  Furthermore, in response to the start of variable display, the effect control CPU 120 performs settings for updating the hold display in the hold area 5HA and the active display in the active character area 5HB (step S533).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S534), and ends the variable display start setting process.

  Again, referring back to FIG. The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (for example, the effect control timer setting unit) of the RAM 122, and the effect control determined in step S171. Various control data are read from the pattern, and a display control command is output to the display control unit 123 based on the control data. The display control unit 123 determines the content of control of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120, generates image data, and the active change effect during the variable display of the decorative design, The image display device 5 is caused to display images in various effects including display of the hold change effect, the character effect, and other notice effects.

  In the present embodiment, the character display period is limited. For example, as shown in FIG. 27, after the power is turned on, the character is displayed during a non-fluctuating period in which there is no hold and the decorative symbols are not variably displayed. The character is also displayed after the change starts. However, when the effect of super reach is executed, the character is not displayed in the period from the start of super reach to the end of fluctuation so as not to hinder the effect of super reach. That is, the character stays resident except for the period from when the super reach is started until the end of the change. The effect control pattern is set so as to satisfy such display and non-display of the character.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating an example of display during execution of the expected change degree suggestion effect and the explanation effect. First, as shown in FIG. 28 (A), during variable display of decorative symbols, the effect control CPU 120 displays a holding display HR whose color is white in the holding area 5HA and also displays it in the active character area 5HB. AC, A character CHA, and B character CHB are displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the V-con display VC in the V-con area 5HC. In FIG. 28A, the active display AC is displayed in red.

  In this state, when the character effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 28B, the effect control CPU 120 causes the A character CHA to display the letter ML1 from the active display AC.

  Further, when it is determined that the character effect is the expected change expectation effect, as shown in FIG. 28C, the effect control CPU 120 displays the letter ML2 in an open state in the main area 5HD. At the same time, as the text of the letter ML2, a display (here “chance”) determined as the character display type at the time of the change expectation suggestion effect is displayed. In FIG. 28C, the lower part of the letter ML2 (the image on the back) is transmitted, so that both the content of the variation expectation suggesting effect and the decorative design can be recognized.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the character effect is an explanatory effect, as shown in FIG. 28D, the effect control CPU 120 displays an open letter ML3 in the main area 5HD, and An explanation is displayed as the text of the letter ML3. In FIG. 28D, the lower part of the letter ML3 (the image on the back) is transmitted so that both the contents of the explanation effect and the decorative design can be recognized.

  Again, referring back to FIG. The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. When the hit start designation command is received, the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit gaming state, and the jackpot type specified by the display result designation command received before that is “probable change”. Or, if it is “non-probable change”, the value of the production process flag is updated to “4”. Further, when the production control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command (when the hit start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed), it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “lost”. Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value.

  The special winning opening normal opening process of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In the special winning opening normal opening process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the jackpot gaming state of “probability change” or “non-probability change”, and the effect image based on the setting content Is displayed on the display area of the image display device 5, voice and sound effects are output from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and a command (electricity) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control in the jackpot gaming state of “probability change” or “non-probability change” such as lighting / extinguishing / flashing of the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED by the output of the decoration signal) , Including the effect control notified in the image display device 5). In the special winning opening normal opening process, for example, in response to receiving a jackpot end designation command from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5” which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. To do.

  The ending effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, for example, and displays an effect image based on the set content in the display area of the image display device 5. The sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13; Various effect controls such as turning on / off / flashing the LED are executed at the end of the big hit gaming state. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, in the image display device 5, the hold display is displayed in the hold area 5HA. In addition, an active display is displayed in the active character area 5HB, and an A character that can execute an explanation effect that is a character effect and an expected change expectation effect is displayed. When the variation expectation suggesting effect or explanation effect, which is a character effect, is executed, the character A is displayed in a manner of receiving a letter from the active display, and a letter in an open state is displayed in the main area 5HD. Is done. By executing such a character effect, an effect using the active display AC becomes possible, and the game entertainment can be improved. Further, even if the images are overlapped as a result of the various effects such as the explanation effect and the variation expectation suggesting effect, at least a part of the overlapping portion in the front side (front side) image is displayed in a transparent state. be able to. For this reason, even if a plurality of image displays are performed at the same time, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing or misrecognizing the contents, and to improve the game entertainment.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24, the ratio of the character effect being executed differs according to the color of the active display. For this reason, when the character effect is executed or not, attention can be paid to the color of the active display, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, active display and hold display are displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbols, but the character effect is executed by displaying the mode in which the A character receives the letter from the active display. . Thereby, the production pattern using active display becomes abundant, and it can improve game entertainment.

  In the present embodiment, the holding area 5HA and the active character area 5HB are provided, and the A character is displayed together with the active character area 5HB active display. Thereby, attention can be paid to the display in the active character area 5HB, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the character is displayed during the non-fluctuating period in which there is no hold and the decorative symbols are not variably displayed, and the character is also displayed after the variation is started. However, when the effect of super reach is executed, the character is not displayed during the period from the start of super reach to the end of fluctuation. As described above, since the character stays in the period other than the period from the start of super reach to the end of the fluctuation, attention is paid to the character, and the game entertainment is improved.

  In the present embodiment, as the character effect, the change expectation suggestion effect and the explanation effect are prepared. Based on the execution type determination ratio of the character effect shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to make the jackpot expectation degree different between the change expectation suggestion effect and the explanation effect. As a result, the pattern of character effects becomes rich, and attention can be paid to the character effects, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

  In addition, this invention is not limited to the said embodiment, A various change and application are possible.

  For example, a character may be used in a pending change effect. FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display at the time of executing the hold change effect using the B character. First, as shown in FIG. 29A, during the variable display of the decorative design, the effect control CPU 120 displays the hold display HR whose color is white in the hold area 5HA and the active display in the active character area 5HB. AC, A character CHA, and B character CHB are displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the V-con display VC in the V-con area 5HC. In FIG. 28A, the active display AC is displayed in white.

  When the hold change effect is executed from this state, as shown in FIG. 29B, the effect control CPU 120 displays the B character CHB moving from the active character area 5HB to the hold area 5HA. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 28C, the effect control CPU 120 performs display for changing the color of the hold display HR that is the target of the hold change effect from white to another color (for example, red). Thereby, the production | presentation using a character becomes various and can improve game entertainment.

  In the above-described embodiment, in the character effect, the display in which the A character receives the letter from the active display to the active display is performed, but the display in the aspect of receiving something other than the letter may be performed. For example, in FIG. 30, when the character effect is executed, the effect control CPU 120 displays an aspect in which the A character CHA receives the present box BX from the active display AC. The present box BX is opened in the same manner as the letter ML1, and the display determined as the character display type is displayed in the case of the change expectation suggestion effect, and the explanation is displayed in the case of the explanation effect.

  In addition, when both the display of the mode in which the A character receives the letter from the active display and the display of the mode of receiving the present box are executable, the reception timing and the opening timing may be different. For example, as shown in FIG. 31, it is assumed that the reach effect is executed after the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times. When a letter is used, the character A receives from the active display at the timing when the first pseudo-rendition production (pseudo 1) is started, and further a display for opening is performed. After that, the A character receives from the active display at the timing when the second pseudo-rendition production (pseudo 2) is started, and further displays to be opened, and the third pseudo-rendition production (pseudo 3) is started. The A character receives from the active display at the timing, and the display for opening is further performed.

  On the other hand, when the present box is used, the A character is received from the active display at the timing when the first pseudo-rendition production (pseudo 1) is started, and further, an opening display is performed. After that, the A character opens at each of the timing when the second pseudo-rendition production (pseudo-2) is started, the timing when the third pseudo-rendition production (pseudo-3) is started, and the start timing of the reach production. Display is performed.

  Thus, while diversifying the items used for the character presentation, and also by changing the timing at which the A character receives from the active display and the opening timing, the presentation can be varied and the active display is the A character. It is possible to improve the game entertainment interest by paying attention to the timing (actual character A receives from the active display).

  In FIG. 31, a letter is received and opened at the start of the pseudo-rendition production, or a display that opens the present box is displayed. However, the letter is received at a timing other than the start of the pseudo-rendition production. A display that is received and opened or a display that opens the present box may be performed. Further, a plurality of timings at which a letter is received and opened and a plurality of timings at which a gift box is opened may be partially different, or all may be different. Further, the receipt of the letter may be displayed only once, and the opening may be displayed at a plurality of timings. Furthermore, when the effect is executed as a result of opening the letter or as a result of opening the present box, the effect may vary depending on the timing at which the letter is opened or the present box is opened. It may be performed in a manner.

  In the above-described embodiment, the character effect using the A character is executed. However, the character effect using the B character may be executed.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating an example of display at the time of execution of the expected change degree suggestion effect using the B character. First, as shown in FIG. 32A, during the variable display of the decorative design, the effect control CPU 120 displays the hold display HR whose color is white in the hold area 5HA and the active display in the active character area 5HB. AC, A character CHA, and B character CHB are displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the V-con display VC in the V-con area 5HC. In FIG. 32A, the active display AC is displayed in white.

  In this state, when the expected change expectation effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 32 (B), the effect control CPU 120 displays the B character CHB moving to the main area 5HD. At this time, at least a part of the image of the B character CHB may be transmitted so that the decorative design of the main area 5HD can be recognized.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32C, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display (here, “SP”) determined as the character display type at the time of the change expectation suggestion effect in the main area 5HD. 32 may be executed using the A character, or the character effect shown in FIG. 28 may be executed using the B character. At this time, at least a part of the “SP” image may be transmitted so that the decorative design of the main area 5HD can be recognized.

  As described above, by executing various character effects using the A character and the B character, the character effects become diverse and the game entertainment can be improved.

  In addition, when variable display of decorative symbols is being executed, a waiting time until execution of a notice (eg, pseudo-ream, background notice after reach, etc.) that suggests an expected degree of advantageous state is displayed. A timer effect may be executed as a special effect.

  FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display when the timer effect is executed. First, as shown in FIG. 33 (A), during the variable display of decorative symbols, the effect control CPU 120 displays a holding display HR whose color is white in the holding area 5HA and an active display in the active character area 5HB. AC, A character CHA, and B character CHB are displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the V-con display VC in the V-con area 5HC between the holding area 5HA and the active character area 5HB. In FIG. 33A, the active display AC is displayed in white. In addition, it is determined whether or not a point is awarded without branching from a predetermined effect (for example, an effect that suggests a big hit expectation degree (step-up notice, etc.) or a big hit expectation degree is not suggested during the variable display of the decorative symbol. Including the production and the like), points are given in the predetermined production. The effect control CPU 120 displays the points in the V-con region 5HC as the color of the V-con display VC gradually changes from below.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 33B, when the point becomes maximum (MAX) and the overall color of the V-con display VC changes, the effect control CPU 120 displays the timer display TM on the upper part of the V-con display VC. Let Further, as shown in FIG. 33 (C), the CPU 120 for effect control restores the color of the V-con display VC and performs a display that gradually counts down the time in the timer display TM. The timer display TM may be counted up. In addition, the timer display TM is not limited to a mode in which the time is clearly shown, and may be a display in which the player cannot clearly recognize the time, for example, a display imitating an hourglass.

  Thus, by displaying the timer display TM in the timer effect in the V-con area 5HC between the holding area 5HA and the active character area 5HB, it is possible to improve the game entertainment interest by paying attention to the V-con area 5HC. it can.

  Moreover, you may make it change the aspect of the hold display before the hold display used as the object of a hold change effect. FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display when the mode of the hold display before the hold display that is the target of the hold change effect is changed. First, as shown in FIG. 34A, during the variable display of the decorative design, the effect control CPU 120 displays the hold display HR whose color is white in the hold area 5HA and the active display in the active character area 5HB. AC, A character CHA, and B character CHB are displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the V-con display VC in the V-con area 5HC. In FIG. 34A, the active display AC is displayed in white.

  When a new hold occurs in this state, the hold display HR is increased by one as shown in FIG. When the color change pattern is set in the hold information corresponding to the new hold, the effect control CPU 120 can determine that the new hold display HR is the hold display that is the target of the hold change effect. When the new hold display HR is the target of the hold change effect, as shown in FIG. 34 (C), the decorative design stops, and the effect control CPU 120 holds the hold display before the new hold display HR. Display to change the mode of HR. After that, when the variable display of the decorative design at the timing when the hold change effect is executed is started, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 34 (D), displays the active display AC, A character in the active character area 5HB. The CHA and B character CHB are erased, and the production of the mini game is started. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 34 (E), when changing the color of the hold display HR that is the target of the hold change effect, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the mini game is in a successful state. In addition, “success” is displayed in the active character area 5HB, and the color of the hold display HR that is the target of the hold change effect is changed according to the success of the mini game. Thereby, the pending change effect can be varied, and the game entertainment can be improved. On the other hand, when the color of the hold display HR that is the target of the hold change effect is not changed, the effect control CPU 120 displays “failure” in the active character area 5HB to indicate that the mini game has failed. Is displayed, and the color of the hold display HR that is the target of the hold change effect is not changed.

  In FIG. 34, all of the hold display HR before the new hold display HR are changed to display the character in the same mode. It is possible to change the display to a character display in a different mode. In addition, the success rate of the mini game to be executed thereafter (the color of the hold display HR that is the target of the hold change effect according to the success of the mini game depends on the type and combination of the displayed characters after the change) The rate of change) may be different. Thereby, the aspect of a production becomes various and a game entertainment interest improves.

  Further, as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of the big hit, the reserved area 5HA and the active character area 5HB may be changed to a special mode. FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display when the modes of the reserved area and the active character area are changed. First, as shown in FIG. 35A, during the variable display of the decorative design, the effect control CPU 120 displays the hold display HR whose color is white in the hold area 5HA and also displays the active display in the active character area 5HB. AC, A character CHA, and B character CHB are displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the V-con display VC in the V-con area 5HC. In FIG. 35A, the active display AC is displayed in white.

  For example, when the result of variable display of decorative symbols is a big hit, the CPU 120 for effect control changes the reserved area 5HA and the active character area 5HB to a special mode at a higher rate than the case of a loss. . In the case of changing, the effect control CPU 120 displays “WARNING” in the reserved area 5HA and the active character area 5HB as shown in FIG. “WARNING” is displayed so as not to cover the V-con area 5HC. Further, the A character CHA and the B character CHB remain displayed in the active character area 5HB. As a result, a variety of effects suggesting the degree of expectation of jackpots can be obtained, and the gaming interest can be improved. Further, by displaying “WARNING” so as not to be applied to the V-con area 5HC, it is possible to prevent the situation of the point indicated by the change in the color of the V-con area 5HC from becoming difficult to be confirmed. Note that at least a part of the image of the A character CHA and the image of the B character CHB in the active character area 5HB may be transmitted so that the “WARNING” character can be clearly recognized.

  In addition, when the reach effect is executed, the image of the reach effect may be displayed on the entire surface of the image display device 5, but the display in the V-con area 5HC is moved and moved during the reach effect execution period. The display may be continued in the area of the part.

  FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of display when moving the display of the V-con area during reach. First, as shown in FIG. 36 (A), during the variable display of the decorative design, the effect control CPU 120 displays the hold display HR whose color is white in the hold area 5HA and the active display in the active character area 5HB. AC, A character CHA, and B character CHB are displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the V-con display VC and the timer display TM in the V-con area 5HC. In FIG. 36A, the active display AC is displayed in white.

  Thereafter, when the reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 36B, the effect control CPU 120 moves the V-con display VC and the timer display TM to the lower left and continues the display.

  When the reach effect is executed, the time in the timer display TM may continue to be displayed straddling before the start of the reach effect. In this case, if the timer display TM remains displayed at the same position in the V-con region 5HC, there is a possibility that the reach effect may be hindered. Therefore, the V-con display VC and the timer display TM are not hindered by the reach effect, and the player can recognize the timer display TM (for example, the lower left position shown in FIG. 36B). By moving and continuing the display, it is possible to easily recognize both the reach effect and the timer effect. Note that the position after the movement is not limited to the lower left shown in FIG. 36 (B), the V-con display VC and the timer display TM do not interfere with the reach effect, and the player recognizes the timer display TM. Any position can be used.

  Further, when the character effect is executed, the display may be transmitted. FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating an example of display when the display is transparent. In FIG. 37, the star Y01 including the character “chance” is displayed as the first preview image, and the memo Y02 including the character Y02-1 and the character Y02-2 which are images in the character effect is displayed as the second preview image. Is displayed. The memo Y02, which is the second notice image, is displayed in front of the star Y01, which is the first notice image, but at least a part of the memo Y02 (the part serving as the base of the memo Y02) is translucent. Therefore, the star Y01 is transmitted, and the player can recognize the shape and display contents of the star Y01.

  Note that the first preview image may be provided with a plurality of types having different expectation levels for jackpots. Here, semi-transparent may be an aspect in which at least the shape and color of the portion where the first notice image is covered with the second notice image can be recognized. As a result, the type of the first preview image can be recognized, and the game entertainment is improved.

  Further, the star Y01 and the memo Y02 are not completely overlapped, and a part of each image is overlapped, so that both are easily recognized. In addition, the character Y02-1 and the character Y02-2 in the memo Y02 are opaque. This makes it easy to understand the information of the memo Y02 as the second preview image, and prevents the game entertainment from deteriorating.

  Note that a plurality of types of second notice images may be provided. For example, when the big hit expectation degree by the second notice image is higher than the big hit expectation degree of the first notice image, the second notice image may be made opaque. Good. Thereby, a display with high expectation degree of jackpot can be emphasized and amusement entertainment can be improved. Also, when the second notice image is an image showing the big hit decision, the second notice image may be opaque.

  In the above-described embodiment, the variation expectation suggestion effect and the explanation effect are used as the character effect type, but the present invention is not limited to these, and different types of effects may be included. Further, the change in the mode of active display or hold display is not limited to the change in color, but may be a change in size, shape, operation, or the like. In the above embodiment, the hold display color for the new hold is white. However, the hold display is displayed in a color other than white from the first stage of the hold display, and can be changed to another color thereafter. There may be.

  In the above embodiment, the hold display and active display colors have stages corresponding to the degree of expectation of jackpot, and the order is white, blue, green, red from lower to higher. In addition, there may be a color or display with a high expectation degree of jackpot. For example, a color or display having a higher degree of expectation of jackpot than red may appear only in the case of a jackpot.

  In the above embodiment, the selection ratio of the color change pattern is different depending on the case of super reach big hit, normal reach big hit, super reach lose, normal reach lose, or non-reach lose, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the selection ratio of the color change pattern may be varied depending on whether it is a big hit or a loss. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the determination ratio of the character effect type and the character display type determination ratio at the time of the change expectation suggestion effect are different in the case of non-reach lose, normal reach lose, super reach lose, and big hit. It is not limited to. For example, the determination ratio may be varied depending on whether it is a big hit or a loss.

  In addition, a sound may be generated when an aspect such as a color of a hold display or an active display changes due to a change effect. Furthermore, the sound may be different depending on the color after the change. For example, different sounds may be produced depending on whether the color changes to red or blue. Furthermore, in the hold display and the active display, when the same color is changed, a common sound may be emitted. For example, a common sound may be emitted when the hold display changes to blue and when the active display changes to blue.

  In the above embodiment, the big hit type is determined based on the value of the random number MR2 for determining the big hit type. However, the condition for determining the big hit type is not limited to this. For example, a specific area may be provided in the vicinity of or inside the big prize opening, and the type of jackpot may be determined based on a game ball entering (passing) the specific area. . For example, when the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit are provided, the probability variation big hit may be determined based on the game ball entering the specific area.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although it is made to control to a big hit game state based on having displayed the big hit symbol in the 1st special symbol display apparatus 4A and the 2nd special symbol display apparatus 4B, it controls to a big hit game state The mode to perform is not limited to this. For example, a specific area is provided in the vicinity of the second start prize opening or inside the second start prize opening, and the game state is controlled based on the fact that a game ball enters (passes) the specific area. You may stay.

(Second Embodiment)
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described.

  In the second embodiment and the third embodiment to be described later, part or all of the contents already described in the first embodiment will be described again (in the same or different expressions as in the first embodiment). A description), a case where a part or all of the content already described in the first embodiment is omitted, or a case where a part or all of the content omitted in the first embodiment is described. is there. In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, different names may be used for the same or similar objects. As an example, the “decorative symbol” in the first embodiment is referred to as “production symbol” in the second embodiment, and “MR1” in the first embodiment is referred to as “random R” in the second embodiment. Further, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, even if the processes have the same name, the processes to be executed may be different. Further, in the description of each step of the flowchart in the second embodiment, for example, a portion described as “Step S1” may be abbreviated as “S1”.

  FIG. 38 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front. FIG. 39 is a hit type table. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is a gaming machine in which a game is played by driving a game ball as a game medium into the game area 607. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 602 formed in a frame shape that is provided on the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6). In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a game is played by driving a game ball as a game medium into the game area.

  A hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 603 is provided on the lower surface of the glass door frame 602. Under the hitting ball supply tray 603, there are provided an extra ball receiving tray 604 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 603, a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 605 for firing the hitting ball, and the like. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 602. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 607 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  The member that forms the extra ball tray (lower tray) 4 is configured in a stick shape (bar shape), for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower tray body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray). A stick controller 122 that can be held and tilted in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right) is attached. It should be noted that the stick controller 122 has a predetermined operation by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 122 with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). A trigger button 725 (see FIG. 40) capable of performing an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 121 (see FIG. 40) that detects a predetermined instruction operation by a push-pull operation or the like with respect to the trigger button 725 is provided inside the operation rod of the stick controller 122. Built-in). In addition, a tilt direction sensor unit 723 (see FIG. 40) for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod is provided in the lower pan main body or the like below the stick controller 122. Further, the stick controller 122 incorporates a vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 40) for causing the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

  A member that forms the hitting ball supply tray 603 includes a push button that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 122). 720 is provided. The push button 720 only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 724 (see FIG. 40) for detecting an operation action of the player performed on the push button 720 may be provided inside the body of the upper plate at the position where the push button 720 is installed. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 38, the mounting positions of the push button 720 and the stick controller 122 are in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, it is good also considering the attachment position of the push button 720 and the stick controller 122 as the position approached to either right or left in the upper plate and the lower plate, maintaining the vertical relationship. Alternatively, the attachment position of the push button 720 and the stick controller 122 is not in a vertical positional relationship, and may be in a horizontal positional relationship, for example. As operation means, other operation means such as a lever switch and a jog dial may be provided.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 607, there is provided an effect display device 609 as first display means capable of variably displaying (also referred to as variable display) effect symbols as a plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified. On the right side of the effect display device 609 in the game area 607, a first special symbol display (first variation display unit) 8a that variably displays a first special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them, A second special symbol display (second variation display unit) 8b that variably displays a second special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them is provided.

  Each of the first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b is configured by a simple and small display device (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers and characters. The effect display device 609 is composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD), and an effect symbol display area is provided on the display screen for effect display variation display in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is done. In the effect symbol display area, a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols for left, middle, and right is formed.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is controlled by a game control microcomputer mounted on a main board (game control board). The effect display device 609 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display 8a, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 609 along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8b performs the first display. 2 When the variation display of special symbols is executed, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 609 along with the variation display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  More specifically, in the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition which is the execution condition of the variation display is satisfied (for example, the game ball is in the first start winning opening 613). Or after passing through the second start winning opening 614 (including winning), the start condition of the variable display (for example, when the number of stored memory is not 0 and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed) The display is not executed, and the big hit game is not executed) is started, and when the variable display time (variable time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. To do. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  When the jackpot display result (bonus symbol) as the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, or the jackpot display result (jackpot symbol) as the specific display result is displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. When the derived display is performed, the effect display device 609 also derives and displays the jackpot display result (combination of jackpot symbol) as the specific display result. When the specific display result is displayed as the display result of the variable display in this manner, the specific game state (big hit game state) is controlled as an advantageous state to which a value (advantageous value) advantageous to the player is given.

  In addition, in the effect display device 609, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) In the state where it is in agreement with the combination of symbols), it is stopped, rocking, enlarged, reduced, or deformed, or multiple symbols are displayed synchronously in the same symbol, or the positions of the symbols are switched An effect performed in a state where the possibility of a big hit is continued before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect.

  Here, in the reach state, when the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 609 constitute a part of the jackpot combination, the variation display of the effect symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed is continued. This is a display state or a display state in which all or part of the effect symbols are variably displayed synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. In other words, reach means a state in which identification information forms a specific display result in a plurality of variable display areas, but at least some of the variable display areas are in variable display. In this embodiment, the reach state is formed, for example, in a state where the same symbol is stopped in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol is not stopped in the middle symbol display area. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called reach formation symbols or reach symbols.

  The display effect in the reach state is reach effect display (reach effect). In addition, during the reach, an unusual performance may be performed with a lamp or sound. This production is called reach production. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (effect design etc.)) or a display mode (for example, a color etc.) of the background image of the effect display device 609 is displayed. ) May change. This change in character display and background display mode is called reach effect display. In addition, some reach is set so that when it appears, a big hit is likely to occur compared to a normal reach. Such a special reach is called super reach.

  Below the effect display device 609, a winning device having a first start winning port 613 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 613 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 613a.

  A variable winning ball device 615 having a second starting winning port 614 through which a game ball can be won is provided below the winning device having the first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 614a. The variable winning ball device 615 is opened by a solenoid 616. When the variable winning ball device 615 is in the open state, the game ball can be won in the second start winning port 614 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In a state where the variable winning ball device 615 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second starting winning port 614 than the first starting winning port 613. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 615 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning port 614. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 615 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 613 than the second starting winning port 614. In the state where the variable winning ball device 615 is in the closed state, it may be configured so that it is difficult to win, but it is possible to win (that is, the game ball is difficult to win). Hereinafter, the first start winning port 613 and the second start winning port 614 may be collectively referred to as a start winning port or a starting port.

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 614, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. And whenever the fluctuation | variation display by the 2nd special symbol display 8b is started, the number of the indicators to light is reduced by one.

  Further, further above the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 613, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). ) Is displayed, a first special symbol reservation storage display 18a is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  In the gaming machine, a ball hitting device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating a hitting operation handle 605 and uses a rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the game area 607. ) Is provided. The game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 607 through the ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 607, and then descends the game area 607. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 613 and is detected by the first start opening switch 613a, if the variation display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display unit 8a starts the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 609 starts the variable symbol display of the effect symbol. That is, the change display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 613. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning port 614 and is detected by the second start port switch 614a, if the variation display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 2), the second special symbol display unit 8b starts the variation display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 609 starts the variation display of the effect symbol. In other words, the variation display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 614. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  The effect display device 609 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. The effect symbol as a symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the change display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 609 are synchronized. Further, the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variation display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 609 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 609 causes a jackpot to be recalled. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, at the lower position on the display screen of the effect display device 609, a hold memory display unit (total hold memory display unit) that displays the total number of the first hold memory number and the second hold memory number (total hold memory number). , A hold display area, not shown). In the combined hold storage display unit, the hold storage number can be specified as the hold storage display by, for example, the number of display of the predetermined image, by displaying the hold storage image (one hold storage image corresponding to each hold storage information, Is specified). In this way, by providing the summation pending storage display unit that displays the total number, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition. In each of the first special symbol hold memory indicator 18a, the second special symbol hold memory indicator 18b, and the effect display device 609, the light emission display and the image display for indicating the number of reserved memories are a hold display or a hold. Called memory display.

  As shown in FIG. 38, a special variable winning ball device 620 is provided below the variable winning ball device 615. The special variable winning ball apparatus 620 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be opened by the solenoid 621 in a specific game state (a big hit game state) that occurs when is displayed and displayed, the large winning opening serving as a winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  In the big hit gaming state, repeated continuous control is performed in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 620 repeats an open state and a closed state. In the repeated continuation control, a state where the special variable winning ball device 620 is opened is called a round. Thus, the repeated continuation control is also called round control. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpots are provided. When it is determined that a jackpot is to be made, one of the jackpot types is selected.

  On the left side of the effect display device 609, there is provided a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying normal symbols that can be distinguished from each other. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) that can display numbers 0 to 9 in a variable manner. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured so as to variably display numbers (or symbols) of 0 to 9. The small display is formed in a square shape, for example.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the display variation of the normal symbol display 10 is started. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol, for example, symbol “7”), the variable winning ball apparatus 615 is closed in a disadvantageous state for the player for a predetermined number of times. To an open state advantageous to the player. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 641 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 641 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  Further, an accessory 612 is provided above the effect display device 609. The accessory 612 is located between the game board 6 and the effect display device 609 and can be displaced by the accessory motor 17. The accessory 612 is usually located in a place where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it, and moves to a position where the player can visually recognize the predetermined effect (for example, a position in front of the effect display device 609).

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken. Further, four speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper and lower left and outer sides of the game area 607. On the outer periphery of the game area 607, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  In addition, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter also simply referred to as “card unit”) that enables lending a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown).

  In the hit type table of FIG. 39, for each hit type in the big hit, the big hit probability after the end of the big hit gaming state, the base after the end of the big hit gaming state, the variation time after the end of the big hit gaming state, the number of releases in the big hit ( The number of rounds) and the opening time of each round are shown.

  Specifically, in the big hit gaming state, after the special variable winning ball device 620 is in the open state, a predetermined open state end condition (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or When the predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls is generated, the closed state is established. When the opening end condition is satisfied, a continuation right is generated, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 620 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of releases in the big hit gaming state reaches 15 rounds (final round), which is a predetermined upper limit value.

  Here, in the big hit of the present embodiment, the total number of game balls that can be acquired in one big hit is about 1500. Specifically, in one round, there are 10 payouts for 1 winning game ball, and the round continues until 10 wins, so about 100 per round (10 × 10 = 100) game balls can be obtained. Furthermore, since the round continues up to 15 rounds, a total of about 1500 game balls can be obtained. In addition, when the special variable winning ball apparatus 620 is opened, a game ball is accidentally set immediately before the special variable winning ball apparatus 620 is closed before a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses. There may be a special number (for example, 11th or 12th) that is greater than the number (for example, 10). Such a winning that exceeds a predetermined standard is also referred to as an over winning. When an over winning is generated, the player can acquire more balls.

  Among the “big hits”, after being controlled to the big hit gaming state, the probability change state in which the probability of being determined as a big hit is higher than the normal state (the normal gaming state that is not the probability change state) as the special gaming state. The type (type) of jackpot that shifts to (an abbreviation for probability variation state, also referred to as high probability state) is called “probability jackpot”. In the present embodiment, the special gaming state is controlled to a time-short state in which the variation time (variation display period) of the special symbol or the production symbol is shortened from the non-time-short state in association with the probability variation state. There is. Note that the special gaming state may be controlled to the short time state independently of the probability variation state.

  In this way, the transition time to the short-time state reduces the variation time of the special symbol and the production symbol. Therefore, when the short-time state is reached, it is easy for an effective start winning to occur, and a big hit game may be performed. Rise. Note that the type of jackpot (type) that does not shift to the probability change state after being controlled to the 15-round jackpot gaming state among the “hits” is called “ordinary jackpot”.

  Further, as the special game state, the frequency of entering the variable winning ball device 615 is increased by increasing the frequency of the variable winning ball device 615 being opened in association with the probability changing state or the short time state. In some cases, the control is set to the electric chew support control state that facilitates winning (higher approaching and higher frequency) in the variable winning ball apparatus 615. Since the electric chew support control state is a high base state as will be described later, in the following description, it is mainly referred to as a high base state.

  Here, electric Chu support control will be described. As electric support control, normal symbol variation time (time from the start of variation display to display result derivation display time) is shortened and the display result is derived and displayed at an early stage (normal symbol shortening control), normal symbol The control to increase the probability that the stop symbol becomes a winning symbol (ordinary symbol probability changing control), the control to increase the opening time of the variable winning ball device 615 (opening time extension control), and the number of opening of the variable winning ball device 615 are increased. Control (opening number increase control) is performed. When such control is performed, the time ratio during which the variable winning ball apparatus 615 is open is higher than when the control is not performed, so the winning frequency to the second start winning opening 614 is increased. As a result, the game ball is likely to start and win (the special symbol display devices 8a and 8b and the effect display device 609 are more likely to satisfy the variable display execution condition). By this control, the winning frequency to the second starting winning port 614 is increased, so that a gaming state in which the frequency at which the second starting condition is satisfied and / or the frequency of execution of the variable display of the second special symbol is increased.

  The state in which the winning frequency to the second start winning opening 614 is increased by the electric Chu support control (high frequency state) is the ratio of the number of game balls to be paid out as a winning ball according to the winning with respect to the number of shot balls. Since the “base” is in a higher state than when the control is not performed, it is called a “high base state”. Further, when such control is not performed, it is called a “low base state”. In addition, such control is control for facilitating winning to the variable winning ball apparatus 615 by supporting the winning with the variable winning ball apparatus 615, that is, the electric tulip, and is referred to as “electric chew support control”.

  In this embodiment, “high probability state (probability variation state)” and “low probability state (non-probability variation state)” are used as terms indicating the state of jackpot probability, and terms indicating a combination of base states are used. , “High base state (electric Chu support control state)” and “low base state (non-electric Chu support control state)” are used.

  In this embodiment, the term “low accuracy low base state”, “low accuracy high base state”, and “high accuracy high base state” are used as terms indicating combinations of the state of the big hit probability and the base state. Use. The “low probability low base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the low probability state and the base state is the low base state. The “low probability high base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the low probability state and the base state is the high base state. The “high probability high base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the high probability state and the base state is the high base state.

  As shown in FIG. 39, as the big hit of 15 rounds, a plurality of types of big hits, a normal big hit and a probable big hit, are provided. The normal jackpot is a jackpot that is controlled to the non-probability changing state, the short time state, and the high base state (low probability high base state) after the end of the 15 rounds of the big hit gaming state. Normally, in the big hit, the non-probable change state continues for the period until the next big hit occurs, the condition that the short-time state and the high base state are executed a predetermined number of times, such as 100 fluctuation displays, and the next big hit It continues for a period until the earlier condition, which is the condition until the occurrence of, occurs. The normal big hit may be controlled so as to become a big hit controlled in a non-probability changing state, a non-time-short state, and a non-electricity chew support control state (low probability low base state).

  The probability variation jackpot is a jackpot in which control is performed to shift to the probability variation state, the time-short state, and the high base state (high probability high base state) after the end of the 15 rounds of the jackpot gaming state. In the probabilistic big hit, such a high-precise base state is satisfied, whichever is earlier, a condition that the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times of 100 times or a condition that the next big hit occurs. It continues for a period until. Note that the probability variation jackpot end condition may be a condition that the next jackpot occurs.

  FIG. 40 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration on the main board (game control board) and the effect control board. 40 also shows the payout control board 37 and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 631. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit. 57. The game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer in which a ROM 54 and a RAM 55 are built. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power supply created on a power supply board (not shown). That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (special symbol process flag, etc.) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with a program stored in the ROM 54. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on a board other than the main board 631.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the special symbol variation display. The random number circuit 503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and generates the random data at random timing. Based on the fact that the starting winning time is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random value. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 that provides detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 613a, the second start port switch 614a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 631. Also, an output circuit 59 for driving a solenoid 616 for opening / closing the variable winning ball device 615 and a solenoid 621 for opening / closing the special variable winning ball device 620 for forming a special winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 560 is also provided. It is mounted on the substrate 631.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, which variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10, which variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 641 is performed.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control microcomputer 700, a ROM 102, a RAM 103, a VDP 109, an I / O port unit 705, and the like. The ROM 102 stores a program and data for effect control such as display control. The RAM 103 is used as a work memory. The ROM 102 and the RAM 103 may be built in the production control microcomputer 700. The VDP 109 controls display of the effect display device 609 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 700.

  The effect control microcomputer 700 directs the contents of the effect from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77 that allows the signal to pass only in one direction from the main board 631 to the effect control board 80. And the display control of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side through the lamp driver board 35 and the speaker 27 through the audio output board 70. Various effects are controlled, such as controlling the sound output.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 sends an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation to the trigger button 725 of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the trigger sensor 121 to the input port of the I / O port unit 705. Enter through. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the push button 720 has been detected from the push sensor 724 via the input port of the I / O port unit 705. To do. Further, the production control CPU 101 receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the operation rod of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 723 and is input to the I / O port unit 705. Enter through the port. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port of the I / O port unit 705 to cause the stick controller 122 to vibrate. Further, the effect control CPU 101 drives the accessory motor 17 by operating the accessory motor 17 via a motor drive circuit (not shown).

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. In FIG. 41, the type of random number, the update range, the usage, and the addition condition are shown. Each random number is used as follows.

  (1) Random R: A random counter for hit determination for determining whether or not to make a big hit. Random R is updated one by one at 10 MHz, is added and updated from 0, and is added and updated to its upper limit of 65535, and then is added and updated again from 0. (2) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (any type of type, normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot) and jackpot symbol (for jackpot type determination, jackpot symbol determination). (3) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination). (4) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination). (5) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination). (6) Random 5 (MR5): An initial value of random 4 is determined (for determining a random 4 initial value).

  In this embodiment, the big hit that is the specific gaming state includes a plurality of types, that is, a normal big hit and a probable big hit. Therefore, when the big hit is determined based on the value of the big hit determination random number (random R), the big hit type is determined based on the value of the big hit type determination random number (random 1). Determined by type. Furthermore, when the type of jackpot is determined, the jackpot symbol is also determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) at the same time. Therefore, random 1 is also a jackpot symbol determining random number.

  In addition, the variation pattern is first determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and is included in the determined variation pattern type using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). To determine the variation pattern. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type. The variation pattern type may be referred to as a variation type.

  In this embodiment, the variation patterns are classified into a normal variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type that does not involve reach and a reach variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type that involves reach.

  When the display result is out of order, such a variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio of the variation pattern type is different depending on whether it is in the short-time state or not in the short-time state. When this is the case, the variation time is shortened compared to when the time is not short. For example, in the short-time state, in order to shorten the average time of the fluctuation time compared to when the time-short state is not, the fluctuation time of a predetermined fluctuation pattern is set shorter than when the time is not short, or the fluctuation pattern type is the most variable. The variation pattern type with the shortest time is selected more frequently, and even when the reach type is selected, the normal reach variation pattern with the shortest variation time is selected among the variation pattern types. By doing so, the average time of the fluctuation time is shorter than when not in the time-short state.

  In addition, such a variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio is different when the number of reserved memories of each special symbol that displays variation is greater than or equal to a predetermined number and when it is less than the predetermined number, When the number of reserved symbols for each special symbol for variable display is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, the number of reserved symbols for each special symbol is less than the predetermined number. You may make it do. For example, in the hold number shortening control state, the ratio of selecting a variation pattern type having a short variation display time, such as a normal variation pattern type, is set to be higher than in a case where the hold number shortening control state is not set. The average time of the variable display time may be shorter than that in the non-holding number shortening control state. In the hold number reduction control, the change display time itself of the change pattern type may be shortened even when the same change pattern type is selected as compared to the case where the hold number reduction control state is not set.

  The variation pattern may be a one-step determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery, instead of the two-step determination method of determining the variation pattern after determining the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 42A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal (non-probability change) jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state, that is, a non-probability change state), and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state.

  Each value described in the left column of FIG. 42 (A) is set as the big hit determination value in the normal jackpot determination table, and is described in the right column of FIG. 42 (A) in the probability change big hit determination table. Each value is set as a big hit judgment value. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change is the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value set in the normal jackpot judgment table (referred to as the normal jackpot judgment value or the first jackpot judgment value). Due to the addition of the unique jackpot judgment value, a larger number (10 times the number of jackpot judgment values) than the probability change jackpot judgment table (referred to as the jackpot judgment value or the second jackpot judgment value at the time of probability change) is set. . As a result, the probability variation state is determined to be a big hit with a higher probability than the normal state.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R). The jackpot determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the jackpot determination values shown, it is decided to make a big jackpot (normal jackpot or probable big hit) for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 42A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit.

  42B and 42C are explanatory diagrams showing a big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 54. FIG. FIG. 42 (B) shows a case in which a big hit type is determined using a holding memory (also referred to as a first holding memory) based on a game ball winning in the first start winning opening 613 (a variation display of the first special symbol is displayed). 1 is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) used when FIG. 42 (C) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using a holding memory (also referred to as a second holding memory) based on a game ball winning in the second start winning opening 614 (the second special symbol variation display is displayed). It is a 2nd special symbol jackpot type determination table used when it is performed.

  Each of the first and second special symbol jackpot type determination tables of FIG. 42 (B) and FIG. 42 (C) is used for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. Based on the random number (random 1), the type of jackpot is determined to be either “normal jackpot” or “probable variation jackpot”, and is also referred to for determining the jackpot symbol.

  In the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 42 (B), there are numerical values to be compared with random 1 values, which are judgment values corresponding to “normal jackpot” and “probable variation jackpot” (jackpot type judgment). Value) is set. The second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 42 (C) is a numerical value to be compared with a random 1 value, which corresponds to each of “normal jackpot” and “probability variable jackpot” (jackpot type determination). Value) is set.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 42B and 42C, the jackpot type determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit symbol determination value) for determining the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to “normal jackpot” is also set as the determination value corresponding to “3” of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to “probable big hit” is also set as the determination value corresponding to “7” of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Using the jackpot type determination table, the CPU 56 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value having the same random 1 value as the jackpot type, and also determines the jackpot symbol having the same random 1 value as the jackpot symbol. To do. Thereby, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

  The first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 42 (B) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 42 (C) have the same ratio determined for the probability variation jackpot. In such a case, the big hit type determination table may not be divided between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Further, when the big hit type is selected from a plurality of types of big hits having different maximum round numbers in the big hit gaming state as the big hit type, the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. You may set so that the ratio by which the big hit type with many round numbers is selected becomes higher than the 1st special symbol big hit type determination table of (B). In this way, in the high base state, the big hit type selection is advantageous for the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 42C may have a higher ratio determined for the probability variation jackpot than the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. . By doing so, the variation display of the second special symbol can be more likely to be a big hit than the variation display of the first special symbol. In addition, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table may be set to have a higher ratio determined for the probability variation jackpot than the second special symbol jackpot type determination table.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a variation pattern table used to select and determine the variation pattern of the special symbol and the effect symbol in the game control microcomputer 560 will be described. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a variation pattern table used for determining a variation pattern in a table format.

  In FIG. 43, (a) shows a determination table for when the normal state is shifted, and (b) shows a determination table for when the short state is shifted. Further, (c) shows a normal big hit determination table, and (d) shows a probability variation big hit determination table. Each determination table of FIGS. 43A to 43D is stored in the ROM 54, is selected according to the gaming state, and is used to determine (determine) the variation pattern type and variation pattern.

  The determination table shown in FIG. 43 includes a variation pattern type determination table that indicates the relationship between random 2 and the variation pattern type, and a variation pattern determination table that indicates the relationship between random 3 and the variation patterns belonging to various types for each variation pattern type. Including.

  In the column of “variation pattern type” or “variation pattern” in each table of FIG. 43, “normal” or “normal variation” indicates a normal variation pattern that does not reach.

  In addition, “normal reach” in each table of FIG. 43 indicates a variation pattern of normal reach that does not perform a particularly flashy effect when the reach state is reached. “Super Reach” indicates a variation pattern for performing a reach effect in which a special effect image is displayed when the reach state is reached.

  Further, as described above, “super reach” is a variation pattern in which the ratio selected when a big hit is higher than that of “normal reach” is high, and the reliability of the big hit is high. Furthermore, “super reach” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is longer than that of “normal reach” (for example, normal reach 10 seconds, super reach 50 seconds to 80 seconds). In addition, four types of fluctuation patterns are set for the super reach, and the big hit expectation degree (the big win becomes the first super reach <the second super reach <the third super reach <the fourth super reach). (Possibility) is high.

  The “expectation” is a concept including an expectation for jackpot, an expectation for probability change, and the like. Specifically, the degree of expectation (also referred to as reliability) for the big hit is an expectation degree (a ratio to be a big hit) when each reach fluctuation pattern is selected. For example, reach fluctuation is performed 100 times. If the number of hits is 60 times, the degree of expectation for the big hit is 60% (the appearance rate (probability) that the big hit appears is 60%). In addition, the degree of expectation for probability variation refers to the degree of expectation (proportion of probability variation) for shifting to the probability variation state.

  Note that the variation pattern shown in the loss determination table is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation display is a display result of “out”. The variation pattern shown in the normal jackpot determination table is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation display is a display result of “normal jackpot”. The variation pattern shown in the probability variation jackpot determination table is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation display is the display result of “probability variation jackpot”.

  Based on these pieces of information, for example, the variation pattern “fourth super reach (80 seconds)” shown in the “variation pattern” column of FIG. It is shown that the variation pattern of the fourth super reach executed in seconds.

  In the table of FIG. 43, “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type” are described as a variation pattern type determination table section indicating the relationship between “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type”. It is a column to show. For example, taking FIG. 43 (a) as an example, there are a plurality of random 2 (1-251) values for each of a plurality of variation pattern types such as “normal”, “normal reach”, and “super reach”. It is divided into numerical ranges. For example, taking FIG. 43 (a) as an example, if the random 2 value extracted at a predetermined timing matches one of the determination values assigned to 140 to 229 among the random values 1 to 251. Then, it is determined that the variation pattern type is “normal reach”.

  In the table shown in FIG. 43, the fields described as “Random 3 Range” and “Variation Pattern” indicate a function as a variation pattern determination table section indicating the relationship between “Random 3 Range” and “Variation Pattern”. It is a column. The variation patterns shown corresponding to each type of variation pattern type determination table are variation patterns belonging to each type. For example, taking FIG. 43A as an example, the variation patterns belonging to the type of “super reach” are “first super reach”, “second super reach”, “third super reach”, and “first super reach”. “4 Super Reach”.

  All values of random 3 (1-220) are assigned to a plurality of numerical ranges in each of a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to each variation pattern type. For example, taking FIG. 43A as an example, when it is determined that the variation pattern type of “super reach” is selected, random 3 extracted at a predetermined timing is 1 to 220 of random values of 1 to 220. If it matches any numerical value of the determination values assigned to ˜70, it is determined that the variation pattern of “first super reach (50 seconds)” is set.

  When the variation display result for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is off, the determination table is selected as follows to determine the variation pattern. In the non-short-time state, when the fluctuation display result is out of place, the normal state out-of-state determination table in FIG. On the other hand, when the fluctuation display result is out of time in the time reduction state, the time reduction state determination table in FIG. It should be noted that by using the determination tables of FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b), the reach ratio at the time of deviation from the normal state and from the time-short state is constant regardless of the number of holds.

  When the variation display result is a big hit for the first special symbol or the second special symbol regardless of whether the time is short or not, the determination table is selected as follows in order to determine the variation pattern. When the fluctuation display result is a normal big hit, the normal big hit determination table of FIG. 43 (c) is selected. When the fluctuation display result is a probable big hit regardless of whether the time is short or not, the probable big hit determination table of FIG. 43 (d) is selected.

  43B is set to be shorter than the normal state shift table shown in FIG. 43A in the normal state shift time determination table. 43B, the fluctuation time is shorter than the reach fluctuation (including normal reach fluctuation and super reach fluctuation) compared to the normal state deviation determination table of FIG. 43A. So that the percentage determined for normal fluctuations (non-reach deviation fluctuations (variations resulting in deviation display results instead of reaching reach)) is low, and the percentage determined for reach fluctuations with longer fluctuation times than normal fluctuations is low. Data is set.

  As a result, compared to the non-time-short state (normal state), the rate of change in the short-time state is higher in the time-short state, so the time-short state is the non-time-short state. The change display is performed with a change time shorter than that in the mean time. By selecting the determination table in this way, the time saving state can be realized. In addition, by setting the normal fluctuation so that the fluctuation time is shorter in the time-short state than in the non-time-short state, it is possible to shorten the pending digestion during the time-short state.

  In the determination tables shown in FIGS. 43A and 43B that are selected when there is a deviation, the data is set so that the selection type of reach type is selected in a height relationship such that normal reach> super reach. Has been. On the other hand, in the determination tables shown in FIGS. 43 (c) and 43 (d), which are selected when a big hit is made, the selection ratio of the reach type is selected in accordance with a high / low relationship such that normal reach <super reach. Data is set. As a result, the ratio of super reach reach production (the ratio of super reach reach production when a reach is selected) is higher when a big hit is made than when it is out of reach. The performance can increase the player's expectation.

  Also, the determination table of FIG. 43 (d) that is selected when a promising big hit out of the big hits has a normal reach compared to the determination table of FIG. 43 (c) that is selected when the big big hit is a normal big hit. On the other hand, the data is set so that the ratio of selecting the type of super reach production is high. As a result, when the probability is a big hit, the ratio of the reach reach of the super reach (the ratio of the reach reach of the super reach when the reach is selected) is higher than the case of the normal big win. By performing the reach of reach, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for a promising big hit.

  Note that such a variation pattern is obtained when the total number of reserved storage (total value) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that display variation is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, the total number of reserved storage is 3 or more). By setting the selection ratio to be different from when the number is less than the predetermined number, when the total number of pending storage is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the variation time is longer than when the total number of pending storage is less than the predetermined number It is also possible to execute the hold number shortening control for shortening. However, the expectation for reach can be maintained by keeping the ratio of reach (including normal reach and super reach) constant even under the condition that the hold number shortening control is executed (for example, the total number of stored holds is 3 or more). In addition, only the super reach in the reach may not be shortened so as to execute the hold time reduction control. Furthermore, the short time control of the number of holdings may be executable by selecting a high rate of normal fluctuation with a short fluctuation time, or may be executable by shortening the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern itself, The combination may be used.

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. As shown in FIG. 44, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits various effect control commands to the effect control microcomputer 700 in accordance with the game control state.

  44, main commands will be described. The command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol displayed in a variation on the effect display device 609 corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol (each corresponding to the variation pattern XX). ). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each variation pattern that can be used as shown in FIG. 43, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by that number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 609 to start the effect symbol variation display.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are display result designation commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the type of big hit.

  The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol is started. The command 8F00 (H) is a command (design determination designation command) for designating to end the variation of the first and second special symbols.

  The commands A001 to A002 (H) are jackpot start designation commands that designate the jackpot gaming state start for each jackpot type (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

  The command A1XX (H) is a special winning opening open designation command that indicates a display during opening of the special winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is a designation command after opening the big prize opening indicating the opening (closing) of the big prize opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  The commands A301 to A302 (H) are jackpot end designation commands for designating the jackpot gaming state end for each jackpot type (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

  Command A 401 (H) is a first start winning designation command for designating that the first starting win has been received. Command A 402 (H) is a second start winning designation command for designating that there has been a second start winning.

  Command B000 (H) is a normal state designation command for designating that the gaming state is a normal state (low probability state). Command B001 (H) is a short time state designation command for designating that the gaming state is the short time state (high base state). Command B002 (H) is a probability variation state designation command for designating that the gaming state is a probability variation state (high probability state).

  Command C0XX (H) is a combined pending storage number designation command indicating the combined pending storage number. The command C100 (H) is a total pending storage number subtraction designation command indicating that the total pending storage number is decremented by one. In this embodiment, the total reserved memory number designation command is issued at the time of starting winning of a game ball to the first starting winning port 613 or the second starting winning port 614 (for example, when a start port switch passing process described later is executed). And sent to the production control microcomputer 700. In addition, the combined pending storage number subtraction designation command is sent to the effect control microcomputer 700 at the time of starting the variable display (for example, when executing the special symbol variable display processing described later). Note that the combined pending storage designation command and the pending storage count subtraction designation command may be used together. For example, a combined reserved memory number designation command may be used as a command that can specify the number of reserved memories after subtraction. Note that the command for specifying the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is transmitted instead of the total reserved memory number, and the effect control microcomputer 700 transmits the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. May be specified as the total pending storage number.

  The command C2XX (H) and the command C3XX (H) are the results of winning determination results such as jackpot determination, jackpot type determination, variation pattern type determination, etc. at the time of starting winning to the first start winning opening 613 or the second starting winning opening 614. This is an effect control command indicating the contents. Of these, the command C2XX (H) is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not the winning determination result is a big hit and the determination result of the type of big hit. The command C3XX (H) is a variation type command that indicates a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range the random value for variation pattern type determination among the winning determination results. It is.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not a big hit is won at the start winning, and which judgment value range is the value of the big hit type or the variation pattern type determination random number. . Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value for designating the big hit and a value for designating the type of the big win are set, and control for transmission to the effect control microcomputer 700 is performed. A value for designating a range of a judgment value as a judgment result of the fluctuation pattern type is set in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and control for transmitting to the effect control microcomputer 700 is performed. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 700 can recognize whether the display result is a big hit or not and the type of the big hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, The variation pattern type can be recognized based on the variation type command.

  The command D0XX is a big winning opening prize notification command for notifying that a game ball has won a big winning opening. The big prize opening notification command is transmitted from the main board 631 to the effect control board 80 when, for example, a game ball passes through the big prize opening.

  Next, a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing data (holding storage data) such as random numbers corresponding to the holding storage on the game control microcomputer 560 side will be described. The reserved storage buffer is provided in the RAM 55.

  In the first reserved memory buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved memory number is secured. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a jackpot determination random number (random R) that is a hardware random number, a jackpot type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, and a variation pattern type determination random number. (Random 2) and random number for variation pattern determination (Random 3) are stored.

  Based on the winning at the first start winning port 613 or the second starting winning port 614, the CPU 56 extracts such random number values from the random number circuit 503 and a random counter for generating software random numbers, A process of saving (storing) in the saving area in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer is executed. Specifically, based on the winning at the first start winning opening 613, these random number values are extracted and stored in the first reserved storage buffer. Further, based on the winning at the second start winning opening 614, these random number values are extracted and stored in the second reserved storage buffer.

  In some cases, “holding stored” indicates that the information related to the start winning as described above is stored in the first holding storage buffer or the second holding storage buffer. Note that the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) and the random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are not extracted at the time of starting winning and stored in the storage area in advance. It may be extracted at the time of the start of symbol variation.

  As described later, the data stored in the hold storage buffer is read out at the time of starting winning and used for the pre-reading notice effect, and is read out at the start of the variable display and used for the variable display.

  When there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 613 or the second start winning opening 614, a symbol designation command, a variation type command, a first (second) start prize designation command, and a combined pending storage number designation command are called. Such a command indicating the determination result of the start winning determination process is transmitted from the main board 631 to the effect control board 80. In the start winning reception command buffer provided in the RAM 103 of the effect control microcomputer 700, the received symbol designation command, variation type command, first (second) start prize designation command, and total pending storage number designation command are received. A storage area for storing data that can identify received commands is secured so that various commands such as can be stored in association with each other.

  In this embodiment, the effect control pattern of the effect symbol performed in response to the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns, the variation display operation of the effect symbol, the reach It is composed of data indicating the contents of control of various effect operations, such as effect display operations in effects, etc., or various effect operations that are not accompanied by display changes of effect symbols. The notice effect control pattern includes data indicating the control content of the effect operation that becomes the notice effect executed corresponding to the notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 631 executes a predetermined main process, a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) and the timer interrupt process is executed. As a result, various game controls can be executed.

  In the main processing, for example, necessary initial setting processing, normal time initialization processing, game state restoration processing other than normal time, random number circuit setting processing (random number circuit 503 is initially set), display random number update processing (variation pattern) (Variable random number update processing such as type determination and variation pattern determination), initial value random number update processing (ordinary symbol determination random number generation counter initial value initial value update processing), and the like.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes a timer interrupt process in steps S (hereinafter simply referred to as “S”) 20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal has been output (whether or not an on-state has been turned on) is executed (S20). Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 613a, the second start port switch 614a, and the count switch 23 are input through the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: S21). .

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 641 is executed (S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, control for outputting a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in S32 and S33. Execute.

  In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol determination random number and a big hit type determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: S23). . The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: S24, S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process (S26). In the special symbol process, a corresponding symbol is executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the big prize opening in a predetermined order. The value of the flag is updated according to the gaming state.

  Next, the normal symbol process is performed (S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order, and sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to the gaming state. Update accordingly.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 700 (effect control command control process: S28). Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 613a, the second start port switch 614a and the count switch 23 (S30).

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (S31: output processing).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process of setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( S33). Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (S34), and the process ends. With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every predetermined time.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process (S26). In the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, a start port switch passing process is executed (S312). Then, any one of S300 to S307 is performed according to the internal state.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, as described above, the RAM 55 stores reserved storage data (first reserved storage data) such as a big hit determination random number obtained based on the start winning to the first start winning opening 613. And a second reserved storage buffer in which reserved storage data (second reserved storage data) such as a jackpot determination random number obtained based on the start winning to the second start winning opening 614 is stored Is provided. In each of these reserved storage buffers, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the number of each reserved storage is secured.

  In the start port switch passing process, if the first start port switch 613a is on, the number of the first reserved storage data is stored on the condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value (for example, 4). 1 is incremented by 1 and numerical data (for example, a big hit determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination) are obtained from a random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating a software random number. (Random number for use) is extracted, and processing for storing (storing) them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer is executed. Further, the value of the total pending storage number counter is incremented by 1, and a process of storing (storing) data indicating “first” in the pending specific area corresponding to the value of the total pending storage number counter after the summation is executed. On the other hand, if the second start port switch 614a is on, the second number of the second reserved memory data is counted on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit (for example, 4). Increase the value of the pending storage number counter by 1 and extract numerical data (for example, a big hit determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination random number) from the random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating a software random number Then, a process of storing (storing) them in the storage area in the second reserved storage buffer is executed. Further, the value of the total pending storage number counter is incremented by 1, and a process of storing (storing) data indicating “second” in the pending specific area corresponding to the value of the total pending storage number counter after the summation is executed.

  The processing of S300 to S307 is as follows. The special symbol normal process (S300) is a process for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, and determining the big hit type in the case of the big hit. In the variation pattern setting process (S301), the variation pattern is determined (the variation pattern type determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number are determined), and the variation time is measured according to the determined variation pattern. This is a process for performing control such as the start of timing of the fluctuation time timer.

  The display result designation command transmission process (S302) is a process for performing control to transmit a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 700. The special symbol changing process (S303) is a process that advances the process to the special symbol stop process when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process elapses. The special symbol stop process (S304) displays the fluctuation display on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b when the fluctuation time corresponding to the decided fluctuation pattern is timed by the fluctuation time timer. This is a process of stopping and deriving and displaying a stop symbol.

  The big winning opening opening pre-process (S305) is a process for performing control for opening the big winning opening in the special variable winning ball apparatus 620 according to the type of the big hit. In the special winning opening opening process (S306), the control for transmitting the production control command for the round display production in the big hit gaming state to the production control microcomputer 700 and the establishment of the closing condition of the special prize opening are confirmed. This is processing for performing processing and the like. If the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the process proceeds to the pre-opening process for the big prize opening (S305). When all the rounds are finished, the process shifts to a big hit end process (S307). The big hit end process (S307) is a process for performing control or the like for causing the microcomputer 700 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended.

  Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 700 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 700 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80.

  The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the effect control main process when the power is turned on. In the production control main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (S1701). ). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (S1702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (S1703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command, and sets data such as a flag that can specify what the received effect control command indicates. Processing (for example, processing for storing data that can identify a received command in various command storage areas provided in the RAM 103) is performed (command analysis processing: S1704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (S1705). In the effect control process, in order to perform various effects such as a change display of effect symbols on the effect display device 609 in accordance with the contents of the effect control command analyzed in S1704, the current control among the processes corresponding to the control state. A process corresponding to the state (effect control process flag) is selected and the effect control is executed.

  Next, random numbers (SR1-1 for determining the left stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1-2 for determining the middle stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1-3 for determining the right stop symbol of the effect symbol used by the effect control microcomputer 700) Etc.) is executed (S1706). Each of such random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 is generated by counting of a random counter that updates a count value by software, and is cyclically updated within a predetermined range for each. By being extracted at a predetermined timing, it is used as a random number.

  Next, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the hold display in the hold display area (moving or deleting the hold display, etc.) is executed (S1707).

  By executing such effect control main processing, the effect control microcomputer 700 transmits an effect display device 609, various lamps, and the like according to the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 and received. By controlling the production device such as the speaker 27, various production controls according to the gaming state are performed.

  Here, the RAM 103 mounted on the effect control board 80 is provided with an effect control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit.

  In the effect control flag setting unit, for example, a plurality of types of states whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the effect display device 609, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 631, and the like. A flag is provided. For example, the production control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as an effect image display operation on the effect display device 609 screen. For example, the production control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, in the effect control counter setting unit, data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters is stored.

  The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (S1705) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 executes the pre-read effect process (S500) for determining whether to perform the pre-read effect and selecting the type of the pre-read effect, and then the value of the effect control process flag. Depending on, any one of S1800 to S1807 is performed.

  In the effect control process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 609 is controlled to realize the variable display of the effect symbol. The control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol is also the second special symbol. Control related to the change display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the effect is also executed in one effect control process.

  The pre-reading effect process (S500) is a process for performing pre-reading determination such as whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, and determining an effect mode when the pre-reading effect is executed. The pre-reading effect is a special symbol change based on the hold information by pre-reading the hold information before the order of the change display (symbol change) of the special symbol based on the hold information (holding storage information) comes. This is a production technique such as determining the contents of the display and giving a notice in advance of how the future special symbols will change. For example, when the hold information is a jackpot, before the variable display by the hold information is executed, the jackpot may occur later based on the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold information. An effect such as giving a notice is performed as a look-ahead effect. Hereinafter, the fluctuation display based on the hold information as the target of the pre-reading effect is referred to as “target fluctuation display”.

  The variation pattern command reception waiting process (S1800) is a process of performing a process of confirming whether a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560 or the like. If the variation pattern command has been received, the process proceeds to the effect symbol variation start process.

  The effect symbol variation start process (S1801) is a process for controlling the variation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) to be started. The effect symbol variation process (S1802) is a process for performing a process for controlling the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern. The effect symbol fluctuation stop process (S1803) is a process for performing control to stop the fluctuation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) and derive and display the display result of the fluctuation display (final stop symbol).

  The jackpot display process (S1804) is a process of performing display control such as a control for displaying a fanfare effect for notifying the effect display device 609 of the occurrence of the jackpot after the end of the variation time. The in-round processing (S1805) is processing for performing display control during the round. If the final round is not completed when the round end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to post-round processing. The post-round processing (S1806) is processing for performing display control between rounds. If the round start condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to in-round processing. If the final round has ended, the process proceeds to jackpot end processing. The big hit end effect process (S1807) is a process of performing display control for notifying the player that the big hit game state has ended in the effect display device 609.

  The effect control CPU 101 is a process stored in the ROM 102 during a predetermined effect control period from the start of the variable display to the stop of the variable display and from the start of the big hit gaming state to the end of the big hit gaming state. In accordance with the process data set in the table, an effect device (effect parts) such as the effect display device 609 is controlled.

  The process table includes process timer set values and data obtained by collecting a plurality of combinations of display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variation time (variation display time) of the variation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol). Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 609 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Such a process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  Next, various effects performed in the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes the jackpot display result, the jackpot gaming state advantageous to the player is controlled. Then, during the round in the big hit game state, a notification effect related to the number of game balls given by winning a game ball is executed. Here, the notification effect related to the number of game balls includes an effect of notifying the number of acquired game balls to be paid out to the winning game balls. In addition, the notification effect related to the number of game balls includes an effect of notifying the occurrence of an over winning by changing the notification mode when an over winning is generated. Thus, the effect related to the number of game balls is an effect of performing some kind of notification for the acquired game balls (number of game balls).

  In addition, a plurality of types of notification effects related to the number of game balls are provided. For example, when the effect state is the first effect state, the notification effect is executed by the first notification mode, and when the effect state is the second effect state, the notification effect is executed by the second notification mode. In other words, the notification effect is executed depending on the effect state. The notification effect according to the first notification mode is executed based on the fact that the number of game media provided during the round (during the big hit gaming state) has reached a predetermined number. Further, the notification effect in the second notification mode is executed based on the fact that the number of game media given during the round (during the big hit gaming state) has become a specific number different from the predetermined number.

  During the round (during the big hit gaming state), each time a game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 620, the number of game balls given is displayed so as to be variably displayed. Further, it is possible to select whether the production state during the round (during the big hit gaming state) is the first production state or the second production state. In addition, the number of game balls acquired by winning over is also considered in the count of game balls for notification effects related to the number of game balls.

  A specific example of the notification effect will be described below. FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining a notification effect. Here, in the present embodiment, the total number of game balls that can be acquired in one big hit is about 1500. Specifically, in one round, there are 10 payouts for 1 winning game ball, and the round continues until 10 wins, so about 100 per round (10 × 10 = 100) game balls can be obtained. When the big hit continues, the previous acquired total number display value is taken over. FIG. 49 shows a case where the second and subsequent big hits are executed.

  FIG. 49A is a diagram showing a display screen of the effect display device 609 in the first round during the big hit game when the big hit display result is obtained. In the first round, an effect that enables selection of the effect state during the round from two modes is executed. On the left side of the screen of the effect display device 609, an A mode image 211 by a girl character is displayed. A B-mode image 212 by a boy character is displayed on the right side of the screen of the effect display device 609. The player selects one of the modes according to the mode selection image 210 indicated by the left and right arrows prompting the player to perform a selection operation. At the start of the round, the A mode image 211 is selected as the initial value, and the left side of the mode selection image 210 is selected. The fact that these images are selected can be known by blinking the images. The selected image may be surrounded by a thick frame instead of blinking, and any mode may be used as long as any mode is selected.

  The player can select any mode during one round. Such switching of the mode (effect state) can be changed by operating the stick controller 122 left and right. It should be noted that the left / right selection can be changed by operating means such as a cross key, or the mode can be switched by pressing the push button 720. Further, three or more types of effect modes may be provided, or the types of effect modes that can be selected for each jackpot may be increased. Further, the mode selection period may be a round other than one round, and the selection operation may be performed only for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) during the round. In addition, a new production mode may be set as an initial value (type of mode selected first) for each jackpot.

  49B to 49D are explanatory views showing display screens of the effect display device 609 when the A mode is selected. 49 (e) to 49 (g) are explanatory views showing display screens of the effect display device 609 when the B mode is selected. As shown in FIG. 49 (b), when the A mode is selected, an acquired total number display image 205 of the number of game balls acquired by winning the big winning opening is displayed on the upper left of the screen. The acquired total number display image 205 increases every time a game ball wins a big winning opening. FIG. 49 (b) shows that the total number of acquired game balls in the big hit is 2000. In addition, the first notification image 204 is displayed at the center of the screen every time the number of game balls acquired by winning in the big winning opening exceeds a multiple of 500. In FIG. 49B, when the number of game balls exceeds 2000, which is four times 500, the first notification image 204 indicates that 2000 game balls have been acquired. A girl image 203 is displayed on the upper right of the screen. Note that the number displayed in the acquired total number display image 205 and the number displayed as the first notification image 204 are the same display at an instantaneous timing. In addition, when the acquired total number is not a good number (for example, when it is increased by 13), the number displayed in the acquired total number display image 205 is different from the number displayed as the first notification image 204 ( The number displayed in the acquired total number display image 205 may be 2013, the number displayed as the first notification image 204 may be 2000), and the like.

  FIG. 49 (c) shows the display screen of the effect display device 609 when the total number of game balls acquired in the same big hit as FIG. 49 (b) is 2500. As shown in FIG. 49 (c), the acquired total number display image 205 indicates that the total number of acquired game balls is 2500. Further, when the number of game balls exceeds 2500, which is five times 500, the first notification image 204 indicates that 2500 game balls have been acquired. Further, the girl image 203 is displayed as a person different from that shown in FIG. Further, in the fourth big hit, the display screen of the effect display device 609 is as shown in FIG. FIG. 49 (d) shows that the total number display image 205 is 5000. Further, when the number of game balls exceeds 5000, which is 10 times 500, the first notification image 204 indicates that 5000 game balls have been acquired. In addition, the girl image 203 is displayed as a different person from that in FIGS. 49B and 49C. Thus, when the number of game balls exceeds a multiple of 500, the girl image 203 changes together with the first notification image 204. Here, the first notification image 204 and the girl image 203 are continuously displayed until the next notification image 204 and the girl image 203 are changed. However, the first notification image 204 and the girl image 203 may be deleted after a predetermined time has elapsed.

  Next, a case where the B mode is selected in FIG. 49A will be described. As shown in FIG. 49 (e), when the B mode is selected, an acquired total number display image 215 of the number of game balls acquired by winning the big winning opening is displayed on the upper left of the screen. The acquired total number display image 215 increases every time a game ball wins a big winning opening. Here, the acquired total number display image 215 in the B mode and the acquired total number display image 205 in the A mode have different character display modes. As described above, the display of the total number of acquisitions varies depending on the production mode, but the display of the total number of acquisitions may be the same regardless of the mode. FIG. 49 (e) shows that the total number of acquired game balls in the jackpot is 2000. A boy image 213 is displayed on the upper right of the screen. In the B mode, such an effect by the boy image 213 is executed. However, unlike the A mode, in the B mode, even if the total number of game balls acquired exceeds 2000, the effect of notifying the total number of game balls acquired in the center of the screen is not executed. In FIG. 49 (e), another effect image may be displayed without displaying the boy image 213.

  FIG. 49F shows a display screen of the effect display device 609 when the total number of game balls acquired in the same big hit as FIG. 49E is 2500. As shown in FIG. 49 (f), the acquired total number display image 215 indicates that the total number of acquired game balls is 2500. Further, when the number of game balls exceeds 2500, the second notification image 214 indicates that 2500 game balls have been acquired. In the B mode, the second notification image 214 is displayed at the center of the screen every time the number of game balls acquired by winning a winning opening exceeds a multiple of 2500. In FIG. 49 (f), when the number of game balls exceeds 2500, which is 1 times 2500, the second notification image 214 indicates that 2500 game balls have been acquired. The second notification image 214 is erased when a predetermined time elapses (for example, after 2 seconds from the display).

  Further, in the fourth big hit, the display screen of the effect display device 609 is as shown in FIG. In FIG. 49 (g), it is shown that the acquired total number display image 215 is 5000 pieces. Further, when the number of game balls exceeds 5000, which is twice 2500, the second notification image 214 indicates that 5000 game balls have been acquired. Here, in the B mode, the boy image 213 displays an image of the same person without changing the character as in the A mode.

  As shown in FIG. 49, when being controlled in the A mode, the notification effect due to the acquisition of the game ball is executed by the first notification image 204. Further, when the mode is controlled to the B mode, the notification effect due to the acquisition of the game ball is executed by the second notification image 214. Therefore, the entertainment of the game during the big hit game (during the round) can be improved by the notification effect according to whether the effect state is the A mode or the B mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 49B to 49D, every time the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 500, the first notification image 204 is used to generate a notification effect by acquiring a game ball. Further, as shown in FIGS. 49 (e) to 49 (g), every time the total number of game balls acquired exceeds a multiple of 2500, the second notification image 214 is used to generate a notification effect by acquiring a game ball. Therefore, by diversifying the notification effects, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the big hit game (during the round).

  Further, as shown in the acquired total number display image 205 of the A mode and the acquired total number display image 215 of the B mode in FIG. A display in which the sphere increases by 10 is performed. Therefore, since the number of assigned game balls can be variably displayed, the interest of the game during the big hit game (during the round) can be improved by the change in the total number display.

  In addition, a mode selection image 210 for selecting whether the A mode or the B mode is selected during the round is displayed. Therefore, since it is possible to select the production state during the round, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the big hit game (during the round).

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing executed in S1704 of FIG. In particular, FIG. 50 describes various flags that are set when a game ball is won at the grand prize opening. In the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 50, the effect control CPU 101 first receives the command received from the main board 631 transmitted via the relay board 77 by confirming the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is (S511). When there is no received command (N in S511), the effect control CPU 101 ends the command analysis process.

  On the other hand, when there is a reception command (Y in S511), the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the reception command is a big winning opening prize notification command, for example, by checking the MODE data of the reception command. Determination is made (S512). In the case of a prize winning prize winning notification command (Y in S512), the effect control CPU 101 counts the number of prize winning mouth prizes, which is the stored value of the prize winning counter number provided in the effect control counter setting unit. The value is updated so as to add 1 (S513). The grand prize winning number count value indicates the number of times that a game ball has won a big winning opening from the time a round is executed until the next round is executed. Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the big prize opening prize flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit (S514), and proceeds to the process of S515. The grand prize winning prize flag is a flag that is set every time a game ball wins a prize winning opening.

  In S515, the production control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is an overwinning. For example, the updated winning prize count count value after the update is a predetermined over-winning determination value (a value larger than the winning upper-limit determination value. In this embodiment, the upper-limit winning determination value is “10”, so the over-winning determination is made) It may be determined whether or not the value is “11”). If it is not an overwinning (N in S515), the effect control CPU 101 ends the command analysis process. On the other hand, when it is over-winning (Y in S515), the effect control CPU 101 sets an over-winning flag (S516), and ends the command analysis process. The over-winning flag is a flag that is set every time a game ball wins a prize winning limit exceeding a winning upper limit determination value.

  In S512, if the received command is not a big prize opening prize notification command (N in S512), the effect control CPU 101 performs setting according to the received command (S517), and ends the command analysis process.

  51 and 52 are flowcharts showing the round process (S1805) in the effect control process. In the mid-round processing, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the designation command reception flag after opening the big prize opening is set (S920). Here, a flag such as a designated command reception flag after opening the big prize opening is set by the effect control CPU 101 when the received command is stored in the command reception buffer formed in the RAM 103, and the big hit game is terminated. Is erased at a predetermined timing.

  The effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (S921) if the designation command reception flag after opening the big prize opening is not set (N in S920). Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect devices (effect display device 609, speaker 27, frame LED 28, etc.) according to the contents of process data n (display control execution data n) (S922). For example, in order to display an image corresponding to the effect during the round on the effect display device 609, the image data is read from the ROM 102 in accordance with the contents of the process data n (display control execution data n), and the read image data is output to the VDP 109. At the same time, a control signal is output. In addition, a control signal is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to control various lamps to be turned on / off. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the start of the first round (S923). Whether or not it is the first round can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the EXT data of the special winning opening open designation command. When it is determined that it is the start time of the first round (Y in S923), the effect control CPU 101 displays a mode selection screen as shown in FIG. 49A (S924), and proceeds to the processing of S925. To do. On the other hand, if the CPU 101 for effect control determines that it is not the start of the first round (N in S923), the process proceeds to S928 without performing the processes from S924 to S926.

  In S925, the production control CPU 101 determines whether or not the selected mode is the A mode. When the selected mode is the A mode (Y in S925), the effect control CPU 101 sets the A mode flag (S926), and proceeds to the process of S928. On the other hand, if the selected mode is not the A mode (N in S925), the effect control CPU 101 sets the B mode flag (S927), and proceeds to the processing of S928. Here, when the player does not select the mode while displaying the mode selection screen, the A mode set as the initial value is selected.

  Next, in S928, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the big prize opening prize flag is set. The big prize winning flag is a flag that is set in S514 of FIG. 50, and is set every time a game ball is awarded to the big winning opening. The effect control CPU 101 resets the big prize opening prize flag (S929) when the big prize opening prize flag is set (Y in S928), and proceeds to the process of S932. On the other hand, when the big prize winning prize flag is not set (N in S928), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the over winning flag is set (S930). The over-winning flag is a flag that is set in S516 of FIG. 50, and is a flag that is set when an over-winning to the big winning opening occurs.

  When the over-winning flag is set (Y in S930), the effect control CPU 101 resets the over-winning flag (S931), and proceeds to the processing of S932. On the other hand, when the over-winning flag is not set (N in S930), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to the process of S940 without performing the processes of S932 and S933.

  In S932, the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the winning counter, updates the acquired total number display (total acquired number display) according to the mode (S933), and proceeds to the process of S940. In S933, for example, as shown in FIG. 49 (b) and FIG. 49 (e), the acquired total number display image 205 in the A mode and the acquired total number display image 215 in the B mode are won by the game ball in the big winning opening. Every time you do it, it will increase by 10. It should be noted that the processing for updating the display of the total number of acquisitions may be executed even when a game ball wins a winning opening other than the big winning opening during the round.

  In S940, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the A mode flag is set. When the A mode flag is set (Y in S940), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to the process of S941. On the other hand, when the A mode flag is not set (that is, when the B mode flag is set) (N in S940), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to the process of S943.

  In S941, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the total number of game balls acquired has exceeded a multiple of 500. When the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 500 (Y in S941), the effect control CPU 101 notifies the number of acquired game balls by displaying the A mode (S942), and proceeds to the process of S945. To do. For example, the display of the A mode means that the first notification image 204 and the girl image 203 are displayed when the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 500, as shown in FIGS. Change). The display in the A mode is continuously displayed until the next display update. On the other hand, when the total number of acquired game balls does not exceed a multiple of 500 (N in S941), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to the process of S945 without performing the process of S942.

  In S943, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the total number of game balls acquired has exceeded a multiple of 2500. When the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 2500 (Y in S943), the effect control CPU 101 notifies the number of acquired game balls by displaying the B mode (S944), and proceeds to the process of S945. To do. For example, the display in the B mode is a process of displaying the second notification image 214 when the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 2500, as shown in FIGS. 49 (f) and 49 (g). Here, the display of the second notification image 214 in the B mode is erased after a predetermined time has elapsed. For example, it is displayed when the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 2500, and is erased after 2 seconds. Note that the display of the second notification image 214 may be deleted at the timing when the round being executed ends. On the other hand, when the total number of game balls acquired does not exceed a multiple of 2500 (N in S943), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to the process of S945 without performing the process of S944.

  In S945, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the process timer has timed out. When the process timer has timed out (Y in S945), the effect control CPU 101 starts the next process timer (S946) and controls the effect device according to the contents of the next process data (S947). The process during the round ends. On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out (N in S945), the effect control CPU 101 ends the in-round processing without performing the processing of S946 and S947.

  In S920, the effect control CPU 101 resets the designation command reception flag after opening the big prize opening when the designation command reception flag after opening the big prize opening is set (Y in S920) (S934). Next, the CPU 101 for effect control selects an interval effect (effect that performs interval display according to the number of rounds), and selects process data corresponding to the selected interval effect (S935). Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts a process timer (S936), sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (S1806) (S937), and ends the in-round processing.

  In the process of S930 to S932 in FIG. 51, the process of adding a winning ball for over winning is executed, and the acquired total number display image 205 in the A mode and the acquired total number display image 215 in the B mode are the winning prizes for the game balls. A variable display of the total number of acquisitions which is incremented by 10 every time a prize is won in the mouth is performed. In this way, the notification effect is executed after adding the number of game balls awarded by winning 11 or 12 more than 10 game balls in one unit game. An appropriate notification effect can be executed.

  Note that FIG. 51 shows a case where the total number of game balls acquired is determined after determining whether or not the A mode flag is set in S940. However, the total number of game balls acquired is determined first, and when the determination value exceeds a predetermined number, an image to be displayed is determined by checking whether the mode is the A mode or the B mode. You may do it.

  Note that a reference (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-75436) discloses a gaming machine that displays an image indicating the number of acquired balls every time the number of acquired balls in a big hit becomes a predetermined number. In the gaming machine of the above-mentioned reference, the aspect of the notification effect is uniform and the interest of the game in the advantageous state is insufficient. The invention according to the second embodiment has been made in view of the above situation. According to the invention according to the second embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the advantageous state.

(Third embodiment)
In the third embodiment, a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a game by a notification effect that is executed when a specific number of game media are won more than a predetermined number will be described. For example, such a gaming machine is as follows.

  (1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and a game medium (for example, a game ball) is easily won in a first state (for example, an open state) and a game medium is difficult to win. Variable winning means that can be changed to a second state (for example, a closed state) (for example, a special variable that executes a notification effect in a gaming machine configured to be controlled to a probability variation state based on a probability variation big hit. Variable winning means until at least one of a winning ball apparatus (large winning mouth)) and a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, ten) of game media are won. Can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) in which a unit game (for example, a round) that can be changed to the first state is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). State control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560), and the advantageous state control means has at least a first advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state based on a probable big hit) and the first advantageous state as an advantageous state. Can be controlled to a second advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state based on a normal big hit), and in one unit game in the first advantageous state, a specific number (eg, 11 Based on the fact that the individual or twelfth prize has been won (for example, the occurrence of an over-winning prize), a notification effect in a special manner (for example, the first big prize opening LED 20c is caused to emit rainbow light and a predetermined winning sound from the speaker 27) Notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect in the form of sound output (for example, the probability variation big hit In the game machine that is configured to be controlled in a probabilistic state based on the above, it is further provided with a part that executes the same processing as steps S3923 and S3924 in the production control microcomputer 700. Features. According to such a configuration, by executing the notification effect in a special mode based on the fact that a certain number of game media has been won in a unit game in the first advantageous state in a number greater than a predetermined number, Interest can be improved.

  (2) Another aspect of the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, wherein a game medium (for example, a game ball) is easily won in a first state (for example, an open state) and a game. Variable winning means (for example, a first special variable winning ball device 620a (first big winning port), a second special variable winning ball device 620b (the medium is changeable to a second state where the medium is difficult to win (for example, a closed state)) The second big prize opening)) and a variable winning means until at least one of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, ten) of game media is established. Advantageous state control means (for example, controllable to advantageous state (for example, big hit gaming state) in which a unit game (for example, round) that can be changed to one state is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds) A special state (for example, a probable change based on the game control microcomputer 560) and the game medium having passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the second big prize opening) provided in the variable winning means in the advantageous state. Special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) that can be controlled in the state), and after the game medium passes through the specific area in the advantageous state, the number of game media is larger than a predetermined number in one unit game in the advantageous state Based on the fact that a specific number (for example, 11th and 12th) has been won (for example, an over-winning has occurred), a notification effect in a special manner (for example, the first grand prize winning LED 20c is rainbow-lighted and a speaker is emitted). 27. Notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect in a manner of outputting a predetermined winning sound from 27 For example, the production control microcomputer 700 includes a portion for executing steps S3923 and S3924). According to such a configuration, after the game medium has passed through the specific area, the notification effect in the special mode is executed based on the fact that the game medium has won a specific number greater than a predetermined number in one unit game in the advantageous state. By this, the interest of the game by notification production can be improved.

  (3) In (1), the notification effect executing means does not execute the notification effect in a special mode when the game medium has won a specific number in one unit game in the second advantageous state (for example, the probability variation big hit is obtained). In the game machine configured to be controlled to be in a probabilistic state based on the fact, the effect control microcomputer 700 does not execute steps S3923 and S3924 if it is determined that it is normally a big hit) It may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, in the second advantageous state, by not performing the notification effect in the special mode, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game by the notification effect from decreasing.

  (4) In (2), when the game medium has won a specific number of game media in one unit game in the advantageous state before the game media passes through the specific area, the notification effect execution means performs the notification effect in a special mode. (For example, the production control microcomputer 700 may be configured not to execute steps S3923 and S3924 when N is determined in steps S3921 and S3922). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the entertainment interest of the game by the notification effect from being lowered by not performing the notification effect by the special mode before the game medium passes through the specific area. it can.

  (5) In (1) or (3), the notification effect executing means, based on the fact that less than a specific number of game media are won in one unit game in the advantageous state, the notification effect (for example, the first large game) (A notification effect of a mode in which the winning opening LED 20c and the second large winning opening LED 20d emit white light) can be executed (for example, a portion in which step S3925 is executed when N in step S3920), and one unit game in the second advantageous state When a certain number of game media are won, a notification effect according to a normal mode is executed (for example, a notification effect is executed in a gaming machine configured to be controlled to a probability variation state based on a probability variation big hit. If the production control microcomputer 700 determines that it is usually a big hit, step S3925 is executed. To) may be configured so. According to such a configuration, in the second advantageous state, the effect of the notification effect can be improved by executing the notification effect in the normal mode instead of the notification effect in the special mode.

  (6) In (2) or (4), the notification effect executing means, based on the fact that less than a specific number of game media are won in one unit game in the advantageous state, the notification effect (for example, the first large game) Before the game medium passes through the specific area, for example, a notification effect of a mode in which the winning opening LED 20c and the second large winning opening LED 20d emit white light). In addition, when a specific number of game media are won in one unit game in the advantageous state, a notification effect according to the normal mode is executed (for example, the effect control microcomputer 700 is N when steps S3921 and S3922 are N). (S3925 is executed). According to such a configuration, the effect of the notification effect can be improved by executing the notification effect in the normal mode instead of the notification effect in the special mode before the game medium passes through the specific area.

  (7) In any one of (1), (3), and (5), when the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, a predetermined game value is given (for example, controlled to a probability change state) That a specific effect execution means (for example, a promotion effect executed in a manner similar to or similar to that shown in FIGS. 56 (2) to (6)) can be executed. In the game machine that is configured to be controlled to a probabilistic state based on it, the effect control microcomputer 700 includes a part that executes the same processing as S3928), and the notification effect execution means includes: If a specific number of game media wins in one unit game in the first advantageous state before executing the specific effect, the notification effect in the special mode is not executed (for example, the probability change big hit and In the game machine that is configured to be controlled to be in a probable state based on the fact, the effect control microcomputer 700 is in the first to fifth rounds in which the promotion effect is executed. If not, steps S3923 and S3924 are not executed), and when a specific number of game media are won in one unit game in the first advantageous state after executing a specific effect, a notification effect in a special mode is executed (for example, In the game machine that is configured to be controlled to the probability variation state based on the probability variation big hit, the effect control microcomputer 700 performs the sixth round and after the promotion effect is performed. If it is determined that the round is, the steps S3923 and S3924 are executed). It may be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of the notification effect by executing the notification effect in a special mode after executing the specific effect.

  (8) In any one of (2), (4), and (6), a special area is selected based on the fact that the game medium has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the second big prize opening) in an advantageous state. Special effect execution means (for example, a part for executing steps S3908 to S3916 in the effect control microcomputer 700) capable of executing an effect (for example, probability change confirmation notification) is provided, and the notification effect execution means has a specific region in the advantageous state. When a specific number of game media are won in a unit game (for example, the sixth round) through which the game media have passed, a notification effect in a special mode is not executed (for example, the effect control microcomputer 700 is in the sixth round. In this case, it is determined as N in step S3921, and steps S3923 and S3924 are not executed) It may have been made. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the execution of the special effect from being disturbed by the notification effect in the special mode, and it is possible to prevent the effect from being deteriorated.

  (9) In any one of (1) to (8), the notification effect executing means emits light from the light emitter (for example, rainbow light emission of the first grand prize winning LED 20c) and sound output as the notification effect in a special mode. (For example, the production control microcomputer 700 executes steps S3923 and S3925) including an effect including (for example, a sound output of a predetermined winning sound from the speaker 27). According to such a configuration, the effect of the notification effect can be improved by the effect using the light emission and sound output by the light emitter.

  (10) In any one of (1) to (9), a predetermined effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect (for example, a prize ball number notification effect, an obtained number notification effect, an accumulated prize ball number notification effect, a cumulative number acquired) A notification effect, a probability change confirmation notification effect, a continuous change number notification, a jackpot song name notification, a right-handed notification, an error notification, an effect control CPU 101 for executing a jackpot promotion effect, and the like. As a first predetermined effect for notifying the magnitude of value acquired in a specific period (for example, a prize ball number notification effect for notifying the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during a big hit game), and in a special period A second predetermined effect for informing the magnitude of the acquired value (for example, a prize ball number notification effect for notifying the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during a big hit game in a continuous game) can be executed. The priority is different between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect (for example, when the prize ball number notification effect is being executed, the cumulative prize number notification effect is not executed, etc.). May be. According to such a configuration, a plurality of predetermined effects can be suitably executed.

  (11) In any one of (1) to (10), the notification effect executing means is configured to receive a first specified number (for example, eleventh) of winnings greater than a predetermined number and the first specified number of winnings. The notification effect is executed using a sound output channel that is different from the second specific number (for example, the twelfth) winning that is the next winning (for example, the effect controlling microcomputer 700 is the eleventh (over winning 1). The first notification effect may be executed on the reproduction channel Ch0 in the first), and the second notification effect may be executed on the reproduction channel Ch1 in the twelfth (second over-winning)). According to such a configuration, the notification effect can be executed on different channels for the first specific number of winnings greater than the predetermined number and the second specific number of winnings that is the next winning of the first specific number of winnings. A decrease in the interest of the player can be prevented. In addition, the notification effect can be executed even when more than a predetermined number of winnings occur at short intervals.

  The second embodiment will be described in further detail. Here, in the second embodiment, it is assumed that the first special variable winning ball device 620a is provided below the variable winning ball device 615. The first special variable winning ball apparatus 620a includes an opening / closing plate, and when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and on the second special symbol display unit 8b, a specific display result (big hit) In the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the solenoid 621a controls the open / close plate to be in an open state, so that the first big winning opening that becomes the winning area is in an open state. A game ball won in the first grand prize opening is detected by the first count switch 23a. In addition, a first special prize opening LED 20c is provided inside the first special variable winning ball apparatus 620a. In this embodiment, the first big prize opening LED 20c is realized by a multi-color LED.

  In addition, it is assumed that a second special variable winning ball device 620b is provided below the first special variable winning ball device 620a. The second special variable winning ball device 620b includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit) on the second special symbol display 8b. In the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the solenoid plate 621b controls the open / close plate to the open state, so that the second big prize opening serving as the winning area is opened. A game ball won in the second grand prize opening is detected by the second count switch 23b. In this embodiment, a specific area is provided downstream of the area in the second special variable winning ball apparatus 620b where the second count switch 23b is provided. Is detected by the specific detection switch 622. In this embodiment, since the second count switch 23b is provided on the upstream side and the specific detection switch 622 is provided on the downstream side, the second count switch 23b Almost all of the detected game balls are won in the specific area and detected by the specific detection switch 622. In this embodiment, 15 prize balls are paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second count switch 23b, and the probability change state is controlled based on the detection by the specific detection switch 622. It is decided that it will be done. In addition, a second special prize opening LED 20d is provided inside the second special variable winning ball apparatus 620b. In this embodiment, the second grand prize opening LED 20d is realized by a multi-color LED.

  In this embodiment, the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. In the specific game state (a big hit game state) that occurs at the time of the game, the second big prize opening is controlled to be open in the sixth round, and the first big prize opening is controlled to be open in rounds other than the sixth round . In this embodiment, when a game ball wins a specific area in the second big winning opening in the sixth round during the big hit game, it is determined that the gaming state is controlled to the probability change state after the big hit game ends.

  Further, in this embodiment, if a winning at the first grand prize winning port or the second grand prize winning port has occurred as a process during the round, the production control CPU 101 performs the first grand prize winning LED 20c or the second large winning prize port. The winning opening LED 20d is controlled to emit white light. In this case, if it is a round other than the sixth round during the big hit game, the first big prize opening is controlled to be in the open state, and thus the first big prize opening LED 20c is controlled to emit white light. In the sixth round, since the second big prize opening is controlled to be in the open state, the second big prize opening LED 20d is controlled to emit white light. Whether or not it is the sixth round can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the EXT data of the special winning opening open designation command.

  53 to 55 are flowcharts showing the round post-processing (S1806) in the effect control process according to the third embodiment. In the round post-processing, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the jackpot end designation command reception flag is set (S3901). When the big hit end designation command reception flag is not set (N in S3901), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the big prize opening open flag indicating that the big prize opening open designation command has been received is set. (S3902). When the big prize opening open flag is not set (N in S3902), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (S3903), and the effect device (effect display device 609) according to the contents of the process data n. , Speaker 27, LED 28, etc.) are executed (S3904).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (S3905), and if the process timer has timed out (Y in S3905), the process data is switched (S3906). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer to start the process timer (S3907), and the process proceeds to S3908. On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out (N in S3905), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to the process of S3908 without performing the processes of S3906 and S3907.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the probability change confirmation notification flag is set (S3908). If the probability change confirmation notification flag is set (that is, a probability change confirmation notification designation command indicating that it is determined that the state is controlled to the probability change state transmitted by passing through the specific area in the second big prize opening is received. If so (Y in S3908), the effect control CPU 101 resets the certainty change confirmation notification flag (S3909). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 starts executing the certainty change confirmation notification in the effect display device 609 (S3910). Further, the production control CPU 101 sets a probability change confirmation notification in-progress flag, and sets a value corresponding to the execution period of the probability change confirmation notification (for example, a value corresponding to 1.0 seconds) in the production period measurement timer 1. (S3911), the process proceeds to S3912. On the other hand, if the probability change confirmation notification flag is not set (N in S3908), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to the process of S3912 without performing the processes of S3909 to S3911.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the probability change confirmation notification executing flag is set (S3912). If the certain change confirmation notification executing flag is set (that is, if certain change confirmation notification is being executed) (Y in S3912), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer 1 (S3913). ), It is confirmed whether or not the value of the production period measurement timer 1 after subtraction has become 0 (S3914). If the value of the effect period measurement timer 1 after subtraction is 0 (Y in S3914), the effect control CPU 101 ends the execution of the probability change confirmation notification in the effect display device 609 (S3915). Further, the effect control CPU 101 resets the probability variation confirmation notification execution flag, sets a probability variation confirmation notification flag indicating that the probability variation determination notification has been executed (S3916), and proceeds to the processing of S3917.

  In S3912, if the probability change confirmation notification in-progress flag is not set (N in S3912), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to the process of S3917 without performing the processes of S3913 to S3916. In S3914, if the value of the effect period measurement timer 1 after subtraction is not 0 (N in S3914), the process proceeds to S3917 without performing the processes in S3915 and S3916.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the big winning opening prize flag is set (S3917). If the big prize winning flag is not set (N in S3917), the effect control CPU 101 ends the post-round processing. On the other hand, if the winning prize winning flag is set (that is, if a winning to the first winning prize winning port or the second winning prize winning occurs and the winning prize winning designation command is received) (in S3917). Y), the effect control CPU 101 resets the big prize winning prize flag (S3918). The effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the winning counter (S3919), and checks whether the value of the winning counter after the addition is 11 or more (S3920).

  If the value of the winning counter after the addition is 11 or more, it is a case where an over winning to the big winning opening has occurred. For example, in this embodiment, the “over winning” is the upper limit number of game balls to be awarded to the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening for each round during the big hit game (in this example, 10 pieces). ) Is determined, but it means that the game ball wins at the first grand prize opening or the second big prize opening exceeding the upper limit number. For example, in this embodiment, even before a predetermined opening time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses in each round during the big hit game, the tenth to the first grand prize opening and the second big prize opening The first grand prize opening and the second grand prize opening are controlled to be closed when the first prize is detected, and the game ball seems to have won immediately before the first major prize opening and the second major prize opening are closed. In some cases, an 11th or 12th prize may be won and an over-winning may occur.

  If the value of the winning counter after the addition is 11 or more (that is, if an over winning is generated) (Y in S3920), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the seventh round or later. Is confirmed (S3921). Whether the round is the seventh round or later can be determined, for example, by confirming the value of the EXT data of the special winning opening open designation command.

  If it is a round after the seventh round (Y in S3921), the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether or not the probability variation confirmed notification flag is set (S3922). If the probability change confirmation notification flag is set (that is, if the probability change confirmation notification has already ended) (Y in S3922), the effect control CPU 101 causes the first big prize opening LED 20c to emit rainbow light (for example, (S3923) A control is performed to emit light in a plurality of colors such as red, blue, and yellow in order. Further, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to output a predetermined winning sound from the speaker 27 (S3924), and ends the post-round processing.

  In this embodiment, the first big prize opening is only controlled to be open in the seventh and subsequent rounds. Therefore, in S3923, there is only a case where the first big prize opening LED 20c emits rainbow light. Note that the second grand prize opening LED 20d may also be controlled to emit rainbow light.

  In this embodiment, the case where the processes of S3920 to S3924 are executed only in the post-round process is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a process mode. For example, the same process as S3920 to S3924 may be executed in the round process. If configured in this way, for example, even if the program is configured to perform processing during the round until all the game balls won in the first grand prize winning opening and the second big winning prize opening are detected, the over winning prize is obtained. The first grand prize winning LED 20c can emit rainbow light or a predetermined winning sound can be output as a sound.

  When the value of the winning counter after the addition is not 11 or more (that is, not over-winning) (N in S3920), or when it is not the round after the seventh round (that is, the first round to the sixth round) Case) (N in S3921), if the probability change confirmation notification flag is not set (that is, if the probability change confirmation notification has not yet been completed) (N in S3922), the CPU 101 for effect control is the first Control is performed so that the special winning opening LED 20c or the second large winning opening LED 20d emits white light (S3925), and the post-round processing is ended. In this case, if it is a round other than the sixth round during the big hit game, the first big prize opening is controlled to be in the open state, and thus the first big prize opening LED 20c is controlled to emit white light. In the sixth round, since the second big prize opening is controlled to be in the open state, the second big prize opening LED 20d is controlled to emit white light. Whether or not it is the sixth round can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the EXT data of the special winning opening open designation command.

  In this embodiment, when a game ball is won in the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening by executing the processing in round S3917 to S3925 of the round processing or the post-round processing, at least the first A notification effect for causing the first grand prize opening LED 20c and the second big prize opening LED 20d to emit light is executed. Then, in particular, by executing the processes of S3920 to S3924, in this embodiment, when an overwinning occurs, the game medium wins a specific area in the second big prize opening and the probability change confirmation notification is executed. After that, if it is a round after the seventh round of the jackpot game, the notification effect is executed in such a manner that the first grand prize opening LED 20c emits rainbow light and a predetermined winning sound is output from the speaker 27. . When over-winning occurs in such a manner, the notification effect is executed in a special mode different from the normal mode (in this example, the first large winning port LED 20c and the second large winning port LED 20d emit white light). It is possible to improve the interest of the game by the notification effect.

  However, in this embodiment, even when an over winning is generated by executing the determination process of S3921 and S3922, it is before the game ball is won in a specific area in the second big winning opening. In such a case, the notification effect in a special mode is not executed. In this way, by preventing the notification effect in the special mode from being executed before the game ball is won in the specific area, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game by the notification effect from decreasing. In this embodiment, when S3921 and S3922 are N, the process proceeds to S3925, so that even if an overwinning occurs, the game ball is before winning in a specific area in the second big winning opening. In such a case, the notification effect in the normal mode is executed. Thus, before the game ball wins a specific area, the notification effect in the normal mode is executed instead of the notification effect in the special mode, thereby improving the effect of the notification effect.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, by performing the determination process of S3921, the second big prize opening is controlled to be in an open state, and a game ball may win in a specific area. In this case, the notification effect in the special mode is not executed (in this example, the notification effect in the normal mode is executed). With such a configuration, in this embodiment, the probability change confirmation notification is not performed in the sixth round in which the probability variation confirmation notification may be executed, so that the probability variation confirmation notification is performed by the notification effect in the special aspect. Is prevented, and the production effect is prevented from decreasing.

  In this embodiment, the determination process of S3921 and S3922 is performed so that the game medium is won in a specific area in the second big winning opening and the probability change confirmation notification is executed, and then the seventh and subsequent rounds of the big hit game In the case of the round, the case where the first grand prize opening LED 20c emits rainbow light and a predetermined winning sound is output from the speaker 27 is shown, but such a processing mode is not limited. For example, when an over win occurs, it is determined whether the jackpot type is an advantageous jackpot that can be controlled to a probabilistic state or an unfavorable jackpot that is not substantially controlled to a probabilistic state, and is an advantageous jackpot If determined, the first grand prize opening LED 20c may be configured to emit rainbow light and to output a predetermined winning sound from the speaker 27. In addition, it is determined whether or not the game medium has won the specific area in the second big winning opening shown in this embodiment and the probability change confirmation notification has been executed, and whether or not it is the above-mentioned advantageous big hit. May be executed to execute the rainbow light emission of the first grand prize opening LED 20c and the sound output of a predetermined winning sound, or a game medium in a specific area in the second grand prize opening. Is determined after the winning is confirmed and the probability change confirmation notification is executed, and the determination as to whether or not it is an advantageous big hit is performed, and the rainbow light emission of the first big winning opening LED 20c and the predetermined amount are determined. The sound output of the winning sound may be executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the number of large winning opening winning designation commands received using the winning counter on the production control microcomputer 700 side is counted, and the value of the winning counter becomes 11 or more. Although the case where it determines with winning is shown, it is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may determine whether or not the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening is 11 or more to determine whether or not an over winning has occurred. Then, different grand prize winning prize designation commands are transmitted depending on whether or not it is an over prize, and on the side of the production control microcomputer 700, based on which major prize winning prize designation command is received, You may comprise so that it may be recognized whether it is an overwinning.

  When the big prize opening open flag is set (Y in S3902), the effect control CPU 101 resets the big prize opening open flag (S3926).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the next round to be started is the second to fifth rounds (S3927). Whether or not it is the second round to the fifth round can be determined, for example, by confirming the value of the EXT data of the special winning opening open designation command. If the next round to be started is the second to fifth rounds (Y in S3927), the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the in-round effect including the promoted effect (S3928), and the process of S3930 Migrate to On the other hand, if it is not the second to fifth rounds (that is, if the next round to be started is a round after the sixth round) (N in S3927), the production control CPU 101 produces an effect during the normal round (promotion) The process table corresponding to the effect during the round not including the effect is selected (S3929), and the process proceeds to S3930.

  In this embodiment, for example, the roulette effect is executed in the effect display device 609 as the promotion effect. In this case, when starting the first round to the fourth round, in S3928, a process table including an effect in a form in which the sphere rotates the roulette is selected as the promotion effect. Also, when starting the fifth round, in S3928, the type of jackpot type is specified, and there is no chance of winning in a specific area in the second big winning opening (it is expected to be controlled to be probable change state). In the case of a big hit, the process table is selected that includes an effect in such a manner that the roulette result is out of place as the promotion effect. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit with a high probability of winning in a specific area in the second big prize opening (highly likely to be controlled in a probabilistic state), an effect in which the result of the roulette is a win is given as a promotion effect. Select the process table that contains it. Note that it is possible to determine which is the big hit type by, for example, checking the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 starts a process timer (S3930), and produces the production device (production as a production component according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of the display device 609, various lamps as a production component, and the speaker 27 as a production component is executed (S3931). In addition, if set, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer 1 (S3932).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 initializes a winning counter (S3933). That is, the value of the winning counter is set to zero.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (S1805) (S3934), and ends the post-round processing.

  When the jackpot end designation command reception flag is set in S3901 (Y in S3901), the effect control CPU 101 resets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (S3935).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the ending effect (S3936). Further, the effect control CPU 101 measures a value corresponding to the ending period at the end of the big hit game (for example, a value corresponding to 3.0 seconds) for the effect period of the ending effect executed at the end of the big hit game. The effect period measurement timer is set (S3937).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 starts a process timer (S3938), and produces the production device (production as a production component according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of the display device 609, various lamps as a production component, and the speaker 27 as a production component is executed (S3939).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (S1807) (S3940), and ends the post-round process.

  Next, a specific example of the effect aspect of the notification effect will be described. FIG. 56 and FIG. 57 are explanatory diagrams illustrating specific examples of the effect form of the notification effect according to the second embodiment. 56 and 57, the effect mode changes in the order of (1) (2) (3).

  As shown in FIG. 56 (1), the left, middle and right effect symbols are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and a big hit occurs, and as shown in FIG. 56 (2), the first round is started and the big hit game starts. It shall be assumed. Also, as shown in FIGS. 56 (2) to (6), promotion effects are also executed in the first to fifth rounds (see S3928). In the example shown in FIG. 56 (2), the case where the promotion effect is started by displaying the image 200 in such a manner that the sphere rotates the roulette on the effect display device 609 is shown.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 56 (3), when a winning in the big winning opening occurs during the big hit game round, the notification effect is executed in the normal mode. In the example shown in FIG. 56 (3), a case where a game ball is won at the first grand prize opening and the notification effect is executed in such a manner that the first big prize opening LED 20c emits white light is shown.

  Further, even when the number of wins to the big prize opening reaches a predetermined upper limit (10 in this example) and the round is ended, an over win may occur. In this case, as shown in FIG. 56 (4), even if an overwinning occurs, the game ball is won in a specific area in the second big winning opening in the round before the sixth round and the probability changes. If it is before the confirmation notification is executed, the notification effect is executed in the normal mode. In the example shown in FIG. 56 (4), there is shown a case where an over-winning to the first grand prize opening occurs and the notification effect is executed in a mode in which the first big prize opening LED 20c emits white light (see S3925). ).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (5), the second and subsequent rounds are executed in the same manner, and when it becomes the fifth round as shown in FIG. The promotion effect of a various aspect is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 56 (6), based on the big hit type whose jackpot type is a probable big hit, the ball enters the area indicated as “probable” in the roulette, and the result of the roulette wins (probable change). A case is shown in which a promotion effect is executed by displaying a character string 201 such as “There is a probable change and promotion!” While displaying an image in such a manner as to result in suggesting that a state is to be achieved. Note that if the big hit type is a big hit that is not a probable big hit (usually big hit), for example, the ball enters the area other than the area marked “probable” in the roulette, and the roulette results are out of place (probable change). A promotion effect is executed in such a manner that an image in a mode that results in a suggestion of not being in a state) is displayed, and a character string such as “no probable change promotion!” Is displayed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where a roulette effect is performed is shown as a promotion effect, it is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, as a promotion, it is suggested that enemies and allies perform battles, suggesting that allies will win if they are victorious, or if allies are defeated, will not be A directing effect may be executed. Also, for example, as a promotion effect, an effect that displays an fortune is performed, suggesting that if the result of the fortune is `` good '', it will be in a probable state, and if the result of the fortune is `` bad '', an indefinite state An effect that suggests that it is not possible may be executed. As such, any promotion effect can be used as long as it is possible to ask whether or not it is controlled in a certain variation state in some manner.

  Further, in this embodiment, the promotion effect is executed from the first round to the fifth round, and the result of the promotion effect is notified in the final fifth round (in this example, the result of the roulette is notified). However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, you may comprise so that the result alert | report of a promotion effect is possible also in the 1st round-the 4th round, without waiting for the 5th round. In this case, if it is after the notification of the result of the promotion effect, the notification effect in the special mode may be executed when the over-winning occurs without waiting for the fifth round or the sixth round.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (7), the process shifts to the sixth round, and the second big prize opening is controlled to the open state. Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (7), in the sixth round, the game ball wins the second grand prize opening, and the game ball wins a specific area in the second big prize opening, and is controlled to be in a probable state. Is determined. The example shown in FIG. 56 (7) also shows that the notification effect is executed in such a manner that the second big prize opening LED 20d emits white light because the game ball won the second big prize opening during the sixth round. Has been. Further, based on the fact that it is determined to be controlled to the probability change state, execution of the probability change confirmation notification is started in the effect display device 609 as shown in FIG. 56 (8). In the example shown in FIG. 56 (8), a case is shown in which a character string 202 such as “probability change confirmed!” Is displayed on the effect display device 609 as the probability change confirmation notification.

  In FIG. 56 (7), when a game ball wins a specific area in the second big prize opening (especially when the first game ball wins in the specific area), the second big prize opening LED 20d. The first grand prize winning LED 20c may emit light with a dedicated light emission color (for example, light emission in red that is different from the special effect notification effect) or a special winning sound (for example, different from the special effect notification effect). A special winning sound) may be output.

  Further, even when the number of wins in the second grand prize opening reaches a predetermined upper limit (10 in this example) in the sixth round and the round is ended, an over win may occur. In this case, as shown in FIG. 57 (9), even if an overwinning occurs, in the sixth round in which probability change confirmation notification may be executed, the notification effect is executed in the normal mode. Is done. The example shown in FIG. 57 (9) shows a case where an over-winning to the second big prize opening has occurred and the notification effect is executed in a manner in which the second big prize opening LED 20d emits white light (see S3925). ).

  Next, the process proceeds to rounds after the seventh round. Even in the rounds after the seventh round, as shown in FIG. 57 (10), when a winning in the big winning opening occurs during the big hit game round, the notification effect is executed in the normal mode. In the example shown in FIG. 57 (10), a case where a game ball is won at the first grand prize opening and the notification effect is executed in a manner in which the first big prize opening LED 20c emits white light is shown.

  On the other hand, when an over winning is generated in the seventh and subsequent rounds, as shown in FIG. 57 (11), the notification effect is executed in a special mode different from the normal mode. In the example shown in FIG. 57 (11), an over-winning to the first grand prize opening occurs, the first grand prize opening LED 20c is caused to emit rainbow light, and a predetermined winning sound is output from the speaker 27 as a notification effect. Is shown (see S3923 and S3924).

  In this embodiment, the case where a predetermined winning sound is output from the speaker 27 only in the case of the notification effect in the special mode is shown. However, the notification effect in the normal mode is not limited to such a mode. Even in such a case, some winning sound (may be the same as or different from that in the special mode) may be output.

  Further, in this embodiment, as a notification effect in a special mode, the first grand prize opening LED 20c is caused to emit rainbow light and the effect of a mode in which a predetermined winning sound is output from the speaker 27 is executed. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the first grand prize opening LED 20c may simply emit rainbow light and may not be accompanied by a sound output of a winning sound. Further, for example, if the light emitting color is different from the notification effect according to the normal mode, the first grand prize winning LED 20c is caused to emit light with a light emitting color (for example, red or yellow) other than the rainbow light emission. Also good. Further, for example, instead of causing the first grand prize winning LED 20c to emit rainbow light, an effect of outputting a sound imitating a voice of a predetermined character may be executed as a notification effect in a special mode. As such, various types of effects can be considered as notification effects in a special aspect.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, a predetermined period (29 seconds in this example) elapses, or a predetermined number of game media (game balls in this example) (10 in this example). ) It is possible to change the variable winning means (in this example, the first grand prize opening, the second big prize opening) to the first state (in this example, the open state) until at least one of winning is established. Possible unit games (in this example, rounds) can be controlled in an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit gaming state) in which a predetermined number of times (in this example, 15 rounds) are executed, and are provided in variable winning means in the advantageous state. The special state (in this example, the probability variation state) can be controlled based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific region (in this example, the specific region in the second big prize opening). In addition, after the game medium passes through the specific area in the advantageous state, the game medium has won a specific number (for example, 11th and 12th) more than a predetermined number in one unit game in the advantageous state (in this example, Based on the fact that an over-winning has occurred), a notification effect in a special mode (in this example, a notification effect of a mode in which the first big prize opening LED 20c emits rainbow light and a predetermined winning sound is output from the speaker 27). It is feasible. Therefore, after the game medium has passed through the specific area, a notification effect in a special mode different from the normal mode is executed based on the fact that a specific number of game media has been won in a unit game in an advantageous state that is greater than a predetermined number. Thus, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the notification effect.

  In this embodiment, the case where the predetermined number of times that the unit game (round) is executed in the jackpot game is 15 times (15 rounds) is shown, but not limited to such a mode, There may be. The predetermined number of times may be once or twice. For example, when there is a sudden probability change big hit or a small hit that opens the big prize opening only once or twice, the sudden probability change big hit or You may comprise so that the overwinning in a small hit can also be detected.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, when a specific number of game media are won in one unit game in the advantageous state before the game media pass through the specific area, the notification effect in the special mode is not executed. Therefore, by preventing the notification effect in the special mode from being executed before the game medium passes through the specific area, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game by the notification effect from decreasing.

  Further, according to this embodiment, based on the fact that less than a specific number of game media have been won in one unit game in the advantageous state, the notification effect according to the normal mode (in this example, the first big prize opening LED 20c or the second A notification effect in a mode in which the special winning opening LED 20d emits white light can be executed. In addition, when a specific number of game media are won in one unit game in the advantageous state before the game media pass through the specific area, the notification effect in the normal mode is executed. Therefore, before the game medium passes through the specific area, the effect of the notification effect can be improved by executing the notification effect of the normal mode instead of the notification effect of the special mode.

  In this embodiment, when an over winning occurs before a game ball wins a specific area in the second grand prize opening, a notification effect in a normal mode is executed instead of a notification effect in a special mode. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, when an over-winning occurs before a game ball wins a specific area in the second big winning opening, a notification effect may not be executed at all.

  Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute a special effect (in this example, probability change confirmation notification) based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area in the advantageous state. Then, when a specific number of game media are won in a unit game (in this example, the sixth round) in which the game media have passed through a specific area in the advantageous state, a notification effect in a special mode is not executed (in this example, special The notification effect according to the normal mode is executed instead of the notification effect according to the mode). For this reason, it is possible to prevent the execution of the special effect from being disturbed by the notification effect in the special mode, and it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered.

  In this embodiment, in the sixth round in which the probability change confirmation notification is executed, only the notification effect in the special mode is not executed, and the notification effect in the normal mode (in this example, the first big prize opening LED 20c and the second Although the notification effect of the mode in which the two major winning opening LEDs 20d emit white light is shown to be executed, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, in the sixth round in which the probability change confirmation notification is executed, both the notification effect in the special mode and the notification effect in the normal mode may not be executed.

  Further, according to this embodiment, as a notification effect in a special mode, light emission by a light emitter (in this example, rainbow light emission of the first grand prize opening LED 20c) and sound output (in this example, a predetermined amount from the speaker 27) The performance including the sound output of the winning sound is executed. Therefore, the effect of the notification effect can be improved by the effect using the light emission and sound output by the light emitter.

[Modification]
In this embodiment, the case where the game ball is configured to be controlled to be in a probable state based on the winning of a game ball in a specific area provided in the second grand prize opening is shown. It cannot be caught. For example, as a big hit type, a normal big hit (a big hit that is not controlled to a promiscuous state after a big hit game. It may be controlled to a short time state or a high base state after a big hit game) and a promiscuous big hit (a positive change after a big hit game). (It is also possible to control the short-time state or the high base state together with the probability variation state.) So that the probability variation state is controlled based on the fact that the probability variation big hit is achieved. In the gaming machine configured as described above, a configuration for executing the notification effect shown in this embodiment may be applied. Hereinafter, a modified example in which a notification effect is executed in a gaming machine configured to be controlled to a probability variation state based on the probability variation big hit will be described.

  In this modification, the specific area need not be provided in the special winning opening, and only one special variable winning ball apparatus (large winning opening) may be provided.

  When a notification effect is executed in a gaming machine configured to be controlled to a probability variation state based on the probability variation big hit, at least a first advantageous state (in this example) as an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit gaming state) In, in this example, it is possible to control a big hit gaming state based on a probable big hit and a second advantageous state (in this example, a big hit gaming state based on a normal big hit (non-probable big hit)) which is less advantageous than the first advantageous state. . Based on the fact that one of the unit games in the first advantageous state among them wins a specific number (for example, the eleventh and twelfth) more than a predetermined number (in this example, ten), A notification effect according to a special mode (in this example, a notification effect in a mode in which the first big prize opening LED 20c emits rainbow light and a predetermined winning sound is output from the speaker 27) may be executed. According to such a configuration, the notification is performed by executing a notification effect in a special mode different from the normal mode based on the fact that a predetermined number of game media are won in a unit game in the first advantageous state, which is greater than a predetermined number. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by directing.

  Further, when a notification effect is executed in a gaming machine configured to be controlled to a probability variation state based on the probability variation big hit, a big hit based on the second advantageous state (in this example, a normal big hit (non-probability big hit)) When a specific number of game media are won in one unit game in the (gaming state), the notification effect in the special mode may not be executed. Specifically, instead of the determination processing of S3921 and S3922 in the post-round processing, it is determined whether or not the normal big hit, and if it is determined that the normal big hit, the processing of S3923 and S3924 is not executed. Good. If comprised in that way, it can prevent that the entertainment interest of the game by alerting | reporting effect declines by not performing the alerting | reporting effect by a special aspect in a 2nd advantageous state.

  Further, when the notification effect is executed in the gaming machine configured to be controlled to the probability variation state based on the probability variation big hit, based on the fact that less than a specific number of game media have been won in one unit game in the advantageous state. Thus, a notification effect according to a normal mode (in this example, a notification effect in a mode in which the first big prize opening LED 20c and the second big prize opening LED 20d emit white light) can be executed. Then, when a specific number of game media are won in one unit game in the second advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game state based on the normal big hit), the notification effect in the normal mode may be executed. Specifically, instead of the determination process of S3921 and S3922 in the post-round processing, it is determined whether or not it is a normal big hit, and if it is determined that it is a normal big hit, the process of S3925 may be executed. If comprised in that way, in the 2nd advantageous state, it replaces with the alerting effect by a special aspect, and the alerting effect by a normal aspect can be performed, and the effect effect of an alerting effect can be improved.

  In addition, when a notification effect is executed in a gaming machine configured to be controlled to a probability variation state based on the probability variation big hit, a predetermined game value is given when controlled to an advantageous state (In this example, it is possible to execute a specific effect (in this example, a promotion effect executed in a manner similar to or similar to that shown in FIGS. 56 (2) to (6)). . Then, when a specific number of game media are won in one unit game in the first advantageous state before the specific effect is executed (in this example, before the result notification in the promotion effect), the notification effect in a special mode is executed. (In this example, instead of the notification effect in the special mode, the notification effect in the normal mode is executed), and after the specific effect is executed (in this example, after the result notification in the promotion effect), the first advantageous state When a specific number of game media are won in one unit game, a notification effect in a special mode may be executed. Specifically, instead of the determination process of S3921 in the post-round processing, it is determined whether the promotion effect is executed in the first round to the fifth round, and the promotion effect is executed in the first round to the second round. If it is determined that there are five rounds, S3923 and S3924 may not be executed (S3925 may be executed). If it is determined that the round is the sixth round or later, S3923 and S3924 may be executed. If comprised in that way, the effect effect of an alerting | reporting effect can be improved by performing the alerting effect by a special aspect after performing a specific effect.

  In the above embodiment, since it is determined that the game ball is actually controlled based on the fact that a game ball has won a specific area in the second grand prize opening, the first to fifth rounds are determined. This suggests that even if the promotion effect is executed and the winning result is notified, it is highly probable that it will be controlled to the probable state. In this modification, whether or not the probable state is controlled by the jackpot type. Therefore, if the winning result is notified in the promotion effect, it can be recognized that the state is controlled as it is.

  In the above-described modification, the first advantageous state with a high degree of advantage is a big hit gaming state based on a probable big hit, and the second advantageous state with a low degree of advantage is a big hit gaming state based on a normal big hit (non-probable big hit). Although a case has been shown, it is not limited to such a mode.

  For example, when a short-time big hit that is controlled only in the short-time state after a big hit game and a normal big hit that is controlled only in the normal state are provided, the first advantageous state is set to the big-hit gaming state based on the short-time big hit, and the second advantageous The state may be a big hit gaming state based on a normal big hit. Further, for example, when the so-called look-ahead determination is performed during the big hit game, when there is a big hit in the hold memory (that is, when the big hit is a continuous big hit), the first advantageous state is set. The case where there is nothing may be the second advantageous state.

  For example, the first advantageous state may be a big hit with a large number of rounds (for example, a big hit of 15 rounds), and the second advantageous state may be a big hit with a small number of rounds (for example, a big hit of five rounds). In addition, for example, the first advantageous state is a big hit (the big hit in which the probable change state or the short-time state continues until the next big hit) in which the number of times of the probability change after the big hit game and the number of short-time continuations are not determined, It is good also as a big hit in which the number of times of subsequent probability change and the number of short-time continuations are defined. Further, for example, the first advantageous state may be a big hit with a large number of probability change continuations and short-time continuation times after a big hit game, and the second advantageous state may be a big hit with a small number of probability change continuations after a big hit game and a small number of short-time continuations.

  As long as the first advantageous state having a high advantage and the second advantageous state having a low advantage are provided in some form as described above.

  Even in one case, there are cases where advantages or disadvantages can be distinguished from a plurality of viewpoints. For example, when there are 5R probability variation big hits and 10R normal big hits as big hit types, the 10R normal big hit with a large number of rounds is more advantageous from the viewpoint of the number of rounds, and it can be considered from the viewpoint of the gaming state after the big hit game. For example, the 5R probability variable big hit which is controlled to the probability changed state after the big hit game is more advantageous. In this case, priority may be given to the 10R normal big hit as the first advantageous state in view of the number of rounds, and the second advantageous state may be set as the second advantageous state for the 5R probability variable big hit. The probability variation big hit may be the first advantageous state, and the 10R normal big hit may be the second advantageous state.

  In the above embodiment, as a notification effect, a first notification for notifying the magnitude of the value acquired in a specific period (the number of prize balls for notifying the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit game) Effect) and second notification for notifying the magnitude of the value acquired during the special period (awarded ball number notification effect for notifying the number of prize balls paid out as a winning ball during the big hit game in consecutive chan) It may be possible. The priority level of the first notification may be higher than that of the second notification (when the prize ball number notification effect is being executed, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is not executed). In this way, a plurality of notification effects can be suitably executed. That is, a plurality of notification effects can be executed according to the priority order so as not to overlap, and a plurality of notification effects can be suitably executed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in one open game (in this example, a big hit game), the number of game media (in this example, game balls) is larger than the upper limit winning number (in this example, 10). Based on the winning of the variable winning means (in this example, the special variable winning ball apparatus 620 (large winning opening)), it is possible to execute a notification effect (notification effect for over winning). Also, different sound output channels are used for the first winning number (11th) and the second winning number (12th), which is the next winning after the first winning number, which is larger than the upper limit winning number. The first notification effect is executed on the reproduction channel Ch0 in the eleventh (over winning first) and the second on the reproduction channel Ch1 in the twelfth (second over winning). The notification effect may be executed). In this way, the notification effect can be executed on different channels for the first winning number that is larger than the upper limit winning number and the second winning number that is the next winning of the first winning number. The fall of the interest of the person can be prevented. In addition, the notification effect can be executed even when a winning greater than the upper limit winning number occurs at a short interval.

Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.
(1) As shown in FIG. 49, when being controlled in the A mode, the first notification image 204 is used to generate a notification effect by acquiring a game ball. Further, when the mode is controlled to the B mode, the notification effect due to the acquisition of the game ball is executed by the second notification image 214. Therefore, the entertainment of the game during the big hit game (during the round) can be improved by the notification effect according to whether the effect state is the A mode or the B mode.

  (2) As shown in FIGS. 49 (b) to (d) and S941 to S942 in FIG. 52, each time the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 500, the game balls are The notification effect by having acquired is performed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 49E to 49G and S943 to S944 in FIG. 52, every time the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a multiple of 2500, a game ball is acquired by the second notification image 214 in the B mode. The notification effect by having performed is performed. Therefore, by diversifying the notification effects, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the big hit game (during the round).

  (3) As shown in the acquired total number display image 205 of the A mode and the acquired total number display image 215 of the B mode in FIG. 49, each time a game ball is awarded to the big winning opening of the special variable winning ball apparatus 620, it is given. A display in which game balls are incremented by 10 is performed. Therefore, since the number of assigned game balls can be variably displayed, the interest of the game during the big hit game (during the round) can be improved by the change in the total number display.

  (4) As shown in S923 to 927 in FIG. 49A and FIG. 51, a mode selection image 210 for selecting whether to set the A mode or the B mode during the round is displayed. Therefore, since it is possible to select the production state during the round, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the big hit game (during the round).

(5) After the process of adding prize balls for over winning in the processes of S930 to S932 in FIG. 51, the acquired total number display image 205 in the A mode and the acquired total number display image 215 in the B mode are game balls. A variable display of the total number of winnings that is incremented by 10 every time a prize is won in the big winning opening is performed. In this way, the notification effect is executed after adding the number of game balls awarded by winning 11 or 12 more than 10 game balls in one unit game. An appropriate notification effect can be executed.
(Fourth embodiment)
The fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described below. The fourth embodiment is a combination of the first embodiment and the second embodiment. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment is a gaming machine that combines the features of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment and the features of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment.

Example 1
First, an example in which the second embodiment is combined based on the first embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28C, the lower part of the letter ML2 (the image on the back) is transmitted so that both the content of the variation expectation suggesting effect and the decorative design can be recognized. It is possible to display.

  In the first embodiment, the first image (the first notice image that is the image of the star Y01 including the characters “chance” in FIG. 37) and the second image that is different from the first image ( The character Y02-1 in FIG. 37 and the second notice image which is an image of the memo Y02 including the character Y02-2 can be displayed at the same time. Further, when the first image and the second image are displayed in an overlapping manner, at least a part of the overlapping portion in the front side image can be displayed in a transparent state (for example, in the first notice image) The memo Y02, which is the second notice image, is displayed on the front side (front side) rather than a certain star Y01, and at least a part of the memo Y02 (the part serving as the base of the memo Y02) is translucent. FIG. 37).

  Therefore, in the process of the big winning opening normal opening of S174 of FIG. 15 in the first embodiment, the processes described in FIG. 49 are displayed by executing the in-round process of FIGS.

  By doing in this way, in the first embodiment, the production state in the advantageous state (the production state during the round, etc.) is set to one of a plurality of types of production states (A mode or B mode in FIG. 49, etc.). Control becomes possible. Further, a notification effect (such as a notification effect by the first notification image 204 or the second notification image 214 shown in FIG. 49) related to the number of game media (number of game balls, etc.) given during the advantageous state is executed. And when it is controlled to the 1st production state (A mode etc.), the information production by the 1st information mode (the 1st information image 204 etc. shown in Drawing 49) is performed, and the 1st production state is controlled by the production state control means. When the second effect state (B mode or the like) is controlled, a notification effect is executed in a second notification mode (such as the second notification image 214 shown in FIG. 49) different from the first notification mode.

  Further, the third embodiment can be applied to the first embodiment. Specifically, the screens described in FIG. 56 and FIG. 57 are executed by executing the post-round processing of FIGS. 53 to 55 in the large winning opening normal opening processing of S174 of FIG. 15 in the first embodiment. Is displayed. Thereby, based on 1st Embodiment, the form which combined 2nd Embodiment and 3rd Embodiment is realizable.

(Example 2)
Next, an example in which the first embodiment is combined based on the second embodiment will be described. First, in the second embodiment, the production state in the advantageous state (the production state during the round, etc.) can be controlled to one of a plurality of types of production states (A mode or B mode in FIG. 49, etc.). Further, a notification effect (such as a notification effect by the first notification image 204 or the second notification image 214 shown in FIG. 49) related to the number of game media (number of game balls, etc.) given during the advantageous state is executed. And when it is controlled to the 1st production state (A mode etc.), the information production by the 1st information mode (the 1st information image 204 etc. shown in Drawing 49) is performed, and the 1st production state is controlled by the production state control means. When the second effect state (B mode or the like) is controlled, a notification effect is executed in a second notification mode (such as the second notification image 214 shown in FIG. 49) different from the first notification mode.

  In the second embodiment, the variable display start setting process in FIG. 21 is executed in the effect symbol fluctuation start process in S1801 in FIG. 48, so that the screen shown in FIG. Can be displayed. That is, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28C, the lower part of the letter ML2 (the image on the back) is transmitted, and both the content of the variation expectation suggesting effect and the decorative design can be recognized. Can be displayed. Also, the first image (first notice image that is an image of the star Y01 including the characters “chance” in FIG. 37) and the second image (character Y02-1 in FIG. 37) that is different from the first image. And a second notice image that is an image of the memo Y02 including the characters Y02-2 can be displayed at the same time. Further, when the first image and the second image are displayed in an overlapping manner, at least a part of the overlapping portion in the front side image can be displayed in a transparent state (the star that is the first notice image). The memo Y02, which is the second preview image, is displayed on the front side (front side) than Y01, and at least a part of the memo Y02 (the portion serving as the base of the memo Y02) is translucent. 37).

(Example 3)
In the third embodiment, the first image is the first notification image 204 or the second notification image 214, and the second image is the memo Y02 or the letter 203. That is, the memo Y02 and the letter 203 may be displayed on the front side of the total number acquired. In this case, at least a part of the memo Y02 or the letter 203 (a portion overlapping the first notification image 204 or the second notification image 214) is translucent. As characters displayed on the memo Y02 and the letter 203, for example, a character for announcing promotion of the number of rounds, a character for suggesting a reserved resort in a big hit, and the like can be cited. For the player, the characters included in the memo Y02 and the letter 203 and the total number acquired are both important information. However, since the player can recognize both pieces of information, the interest can be further improved. it can.

  The effects of the fourth embodiment described above will be described. In recent pachinko machines and slot machines, effects using a display device such as the image display device 5 are abundantly using various images including a plurality of messages and icons. In addition, the effect related to the total number of acquisitions described in the second embodiment is a standard effect that is not an exaggeration to say that it is executed in all pachinko gaming machines.

  In such a background, as described in the fourth embodiment, when the first image and the second image are displayed in an overlapping manner, at least a part of the overlapping portion in the front image is displayed in a transparent state. This makes it possible to prevent the player from recognizing or misrecognizing the contents even when a plurality of images are displayed at the same time, and to perform an effect related to the total number of acquisitions that is a classic. A gaming machine can be provided.

  The fact that the contents of the image cannot be recognized or can be prevented from being misidentified means that it is possible to let the player recognize each effect by the image, so that each effect can be utilized. , Can enhance the fun of the game. Furthermore, since the production related to the total number of acquisitions, which is a classic, can be executed, the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

  Since the third embodiment is a round post-processing of the second embodiment that is the base of the second embodiment, the first embodiment and the third embodiment are based on the second embodiment. Can be realized.

  In the fourth embodiment described above, the total number of acquisitions may be made transparent when the total number of acquisitions is displayed. For example, it is assumed that not only the girl image 203 but also a background image is displayed on the screen shown in FIG. At this time, at least a part of the overlapping portion in the first notification image 204 which is an image on the front side may be displayed in a transparent state. By doing in this way, the 1st alerting image 204 can be displayed, without producing discomfort with a background image.

Next, modifications, feature points, and the like of the embodiment described above are listed below.
(1) In the above-described embodiment, the notification mode of the notification effect may be varied depending on whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, the notification effect mode is a plurality of notification modes, and the notification effect with white characters and the notification effect with rainbow characters are executed. Then, during the big hit game, based on the fact that there is a reserved memory that is a jackpot display result in the reserved memory buffer, a notification effect that is normally executed with white characters may be executed with rainbow colored characters. In this way, it is possible to determine the notification mode of the notification effect based on the fact that the variable display that is the jackpot display result is stored in the holding storage buffer, and to improve the interest of the game during the jackpot game it can. In addition, when the variable display which becomes a jackpot display result is memorize | stored in the holding | maintenance memory | storage buffer, you may be made to perform alerting | reporting effect in the ratio of 100%, and a predetermined lottery ratio (for example, The notification effect may be executed with rainbow characters at a ratio of 50%. Further, in such a case, there is a possibility that the notification effect may be executed a plurality of times in one big hit, and each time a lottery for determining whether or not to make a rainbow character may be executed. . Moreover, if the notification effect by the rainbow character is executed at a time, the subsequent notification effect may be executed by the rainbow character.

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, during the big hit game, the promotion effect from the normal big hit to the probable big hit may be executed. In such a case, when the notification effect is executed in the round in which the promotion effect is executed, the notification effect may be different from the normal mode.

  (3) In the embodiment described above, a plurality of types of jackpots may be provided. And you may make it the aspect of an alerting | reporting effect differ with kinds of jackpots. For example, 4R big hits, 8R big hits, and 15 round big hits may be provided as types of big hits, and the notification mode of the notification effect may be different depending on the type of each big hit.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, an upper limit value may be provided for the display of the total number display. And when a game ball is acquired to the said upper limit, you may make it stop the update of acquisition total number display. For example, when 100,000 is set as the upper limit and the total number of acquired game balls exceeds 100,000, the total number display image 205 in the A mode and the total number display image 215 in the B mode are displayed. The update of the display image may be stopped. In this way, it can be notified by stopping the update that the player has acquired a large amount of game balls, and a sense of superiority can be given to the player. When the upper limit value is reached, the acquired total number display may be changed to a mode different from the normal display mode.

  (5) In the above-described embodiment, it may be changed according to the total number of game balls that have acquired the notification effect mode. For example, in the case where the B mode is selected, when the total number of acquired game balls is 2500, the second notification image 214 is displayed as a white character image, and the total number of acquired game balls is 5000. The second notification image 214 may be displayed as a red character image, and when the total number of acquired game balls reaches 10,000, the second notification image 214 may be displayed as a rainbow character image. In this way, the notification mode changes according to the total number of acquisitions, and the interest of the game during the big hit game can be improved. In the A mode, the notification mode may be different depending on the total number of acquired game balls. In such a case, the notification mode may be different only when the number is a good number such as 2500, 5000, or 10,000, or the notification mode may be different every 500 pieces. .

  (6) In the above-described embodiment, the notification effect may be different when the total number of game balls acquired exceeds a predetermined value. For example, when the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a predetermined value, the notification effect may not be executed, or a different concept may be displayed. More specifically, the notification image may not be displayed after the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a predetermined value. In addition, after the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a predetermined value, a congratulations display such as “Congratulations!” Is displayed as a concept (such as a display that celebrates the achievement of the predetermined value). A notification effect by a display that changes to characters may be executed.

  (7) In embodiment mentioned above, the case where a display image differed as an aspect of alerting | presenting effect according to the effect state (by A mode or B mode) was shown. Such display images may have different character colors, different character fonts, or different character appearances. For example, the appearance of characters may be different depending on whether the appearance direction of characters (numbers) comes out from the left of the display screen of the effect display device 609 and the way out from the right.

  (8) In the above-described embodiment, the image when the notification effect is executed may be composed of different materials. For example, when the A mode is selected, the first notification image 204 and the girl image 203 may be composed of different materials. In this way, images to be displayed can be set separately. As a display method, for example, a combination of images may be determined by lottery. In such a case, a restriction may be applied so that the same predetermined image is not continuously displayed.

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, during the selection of the mode as shown in FIG. 49A, the notification effect may not be executed even if the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a predetermined value. In such a case, the fact that the notification effect is executed is stored in the storage area of the RAM 103 so that after the mode selection is completed, it is notified that the total number of acquired game balls has exceeded a predetermined value. Also good. Further, when the total number of acquired game balls exceeds a predetermined value during the mode selection, the notification effect may not be executed.

  (10) In the above-described embodiment, the case where the A mode and the B mode can be selected in the first round is shown. However, during the big hit game, the A mode and the B mode may always be selected. In that case, in the second and subsequent rounds, the selection display can be selected as an area at the end of the display screen so as not to interfere with the effect during the round by occupying a large area of the display screen of the effect display device 609. A certain thing may be displayed small.

  (11) In the above-described embodiment, the case where the A mode and the B mode can be selected in the first round is shown. However, the player may not be able to select a mode when the special condition is satisfied. For example, in a case where some story is continuously displayed during each round of big hits, the special condition is established that the ending of the story is displayed based on the fact that the big hits are repeated 20 times. In this case, the mode may not be selected during the 20th big hit when the ending is displayed. Also, during the 20th big hit when the ending is displayed, the notification effect may not be executed, or a small window image for the notification effect is displayed in a region different from the region where the ending is displayed. A notification effect may be executed. In addition, the mode of notification effect may be different between a big hit that the player can select and a big hit that cannot be selected by the player (a big hit under special conditions).

  (12) In the above-described embodiment, whether or not the notification effect is performed may be determined depending on whether the player is a big hit that is advantageous or unfavorable for the player. For example, in the case of a promising big hit that is advantageous to the player, the notification effect may be executed, and in the case of the normal big hit that is disadvantageous to the player, the notification effect may not be executed.

  (13) In the above-described embodiment, the game ball counted for the notification effect has been described as being paid out for the winning of the game ball. However, the number of difference balls obtained by subtracting the game balls that have been shot into the game area 607 and taken into the out port 26 from the game balls to be paid out may be used as the game balls that are counted for the notification effect. In order to do this, for example, a launch sensor may be provided at the launch position of the hit ball, and an out port sensor capable of counting game balls taken into the out port 26 may be provided. Then, it is only necessary to be able to count the number of difference balls by monitoring each winning sensor, launch sensor, and out port sensor including the big winning opening.

  (14) In the embodiment described above, in a gaming system configured to include the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a management server connected to the Internet network, the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the management server have a two-dimensional code reading function and an Internet network. Data is exchanged via a portable terminal equipped with a connection function to the player, and in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player's past game history and the player selected by the selection of the player who owns the portable terminal (for example, a cellular phone). You may enable it to perform the game mode (portable interlocking | linkage mode) which becomes possible to play a game in the game mode reflecting production modes (modes from which the character which appears differs) etc. In such a case, the mode of the notification effect during the big hit may be different depending on whether or not the mobile link mode is being executed. Moreover, the mode of the notification effect during the big hit may be different depending on the type of mode selected by the player.

  (15) In the above-described embodiment, the notification effect mode during the big hit may be different depending on different lottery notifications. Notification of different lottery means, for example, in a promotion effect that informs that a big hit will be a promising big hit during a big hit, a complete announcement mode that announces the presence or absence of a probable change by a single announcement and a multiple chance announcement It is like a notification by a chance notification mode for notifying the presence or absence of the event. Such a difference in notification may be regarded as a difference in effect state, and the notification effect during a big hit may be different in the complete notification mode and the chance notification mode.

  (16) In the embodiment described above, the mode of the notification effect during the big hit may be different due to the difference in the music flowing during the big hit. For example, you may make it the aspect of alerting | reporting effect differ by the case where the music of A is flowing, and the case where the music of B is flowing.

  (17) In the embodiment described above, the effect state (effect mode) may be changeable in a game state other than the big hit game. For example, the state of the notification effect during the next jackpot game may be changed by changing the effect state during the short-time state after the end of the jackpot game state.

  (18) In the various effects shown in the above-described embodiment, medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the stop by the player When the symbols on the display means are stopped according to the operation of the button, and the combination of the symbols to be stopped is a specific symbol combination, this is applied to a slot machine (slot machine) in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. Is also possible. In the slot machine, a bonus such as a big bonus (BB), a regular bonus (RB), an AT for performing an effect for notifying an internal lottery result, an RT in which the winning probability of the re-gamer is different from the normal gaming state, The notification effect as described above may be executed when the ART is controlled to be shifted to the AT and the RT. For example, when controlled by the AT, the mode can be selected from any mode of the production state, and when controlled to the first production state, the notification production by the first notification mode is executed and the second production is performed. When the state is controlled, a notification effect in the second notification mode may be executed.

  (19) In the embodiment described above, the big hit gaming state has been described as a representative example as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and advantageous states that are advantageous to the player may include other advantageous states such as a high probability state (probability variation state), a short time state, and a high base state.

  (20) In the above-described embodiment, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 609 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27R, 27L, etc.) are mounted. Alternatively, two substrates, the second effect control substrate, may be provided.

  (21) In the embodiment described above, in order to notify the microcomputer for effect control of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of pseudo-ream, etc. Although an example of transmitting the variation pattern command has been shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notification by two commands, the game control microcomputer uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-ream, a slide effect, etc. before reaching (so-called second if not reaching) A command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode is transmitted before the stop, and the second command is the so-called second stop after reaching the reach such as the type of reach and the presence / absence of the redrawing effect (if the reach is not reach) A command indicating the variation time and variation mode of (after) may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. In the game control microcomputer, the change time is notified by each of the two commands, and a specific change mode executed at each timing is selected by the effect control microcomputer. Also good. When two commands are sent, the two commands may be transmitted within the same timer interrupt. After the first command is transmitted, a predetermined period elapses (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced. In the configuration in which the change pattern is notified to the effect control microcomputer by two commands in this way, the determination result of the display result by the effect process at the time of winning in the second command after transmitting the first command, Alternatively, the prefetch determination information such as the variation pattern type may be transmitted, and the prefetch notice effect may be executed based on the reception of the second command. Here, the pseudo-ream is a pseudo display that is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of reserved memories are continuously performed although it is a single fluctuation corresponding to one reserved memory. Abbreviation for continuous variation. Further, the slip refers to an effect display in which the symbol is slid from the predicted stop position immediately before the symbol is stopped in the variable display. In the above embodiment, the prefetch determination is performed on the main side and the command corresponding to the determination result is transmitted to the sub side. However, the command indicating the random value is transmitted from the main side and the prefetch determination is performed on the sub side. You may make it do.

  (22) As the present embodiment, a gaming machine that pays out game media to the player's hand in response to the occurrence of a win has been described, but the game media is enclosed and the game media is You may employ | adopt the enclosure type game machine which adds a game point (score), without paying out at hand. The enclosed game machine has a circulation path for circulating a plurality of balls, which are examples of game media, in the game machine, and is provided with a storage unit for storing game points. The game points are added to the storage unit, the game points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the ball launching operation, and the game points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of the winning. In addition, for example, a game score for use in a game is given and given using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified from the record information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine into the gaming area using the gaming score or the gaming score given by winning the game.

(23) In the above-described embodiment, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols and effect designs of “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed is shown. It is not limited to the embodiment. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to display a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, the variable display may be performed by alternately lighting and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variation display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

  (24) In the above-described embodiment, the “ratio (ratio, probability)” has been described with a specific value exceeding 0% as a specific example. However, the “ratio (ratio, probability)” may be 0%. For example, when the occurrence ratio of a predetermined game state 1 in a predetermined game period is compared with the occurrence ratio of another game state 2, and “one occurrence ratio is higher than the other occurrence ratio” This includes the case where the percentage of occurrence of one game state is 0%.

  (25) In the embodiment described above, after the variable display result when the display result of the variable display is determined to be the probable big hit is derived and displayed, after the big hit gaming state ends, the probable state is unconditionally changed. An example of controlled probability state control is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability variation determination device that is controlled to the probability variation state when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area provided in the special prize opening in the special variable prize ball device 620. Type probabilistic state control may be performed.

  (26) The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in advance. You may take the form distributed by pre-installing in storage devices, such as a computer apparatus. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter. The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  (27) It should be understood that the embodiment disclosed herein is illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 5C ... Decoration symbol display area 5H ... Display area 5HE ... Active display area 5L ... Decoration symbol display area 5R ... decorative symbol display area 6A ... ordinary winning ball device 6B ... ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... special variable winning ball devices 8L, 8R ... speaker 9 ... game effect lamp 11 ... main board 12 ... production control board 13 ... audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switches 22A and 22B ... Start switch 23 ... Count switch 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 35A ... Controller sensor unit 35B ... Push sensor 41 ... Passing gate 81 ... Solenoid 82 ... Solenoid 100 ... Microcomputer for game control Yuta 101,121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit 124 ... Random number circuit 125 ... I / O
200 ... Character 560 ... Game control microcomputer 609 ... Effect display device 612 ... Actors 613 ... Start winning opening 613a ... Start opening switch 614 ... Start winning opening 614a ... Start opening switch 615 ... Variable winning ball device 616 ... Solenoid to open / close 616 ... Solenoid 620 ... Special variable winning ball device 620a ... Special variable winning ball device 620b ... Special variable winning ball devices 621, 621a, 621b ... Solenoid 622 ... Specific detection switch 631 ... Main board 641 ... Normal symbol hold memory display 700 ... Production control microcomputer 705 ... Port unit 720 ... Push button 723 ... Tilt direction sensor unit 724 ... Push sensor 725 ... Trigger button

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that includes an image display device, performs variable display of identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Production state control means capable of controlling the production state in the advantageous state to any one of a plurality of types of production states;
Notification effect means for executing a notification effect related to the number of game media granted during the advantageous state ;
Predetermined display means capable of displaying a predetermined display corresponding to the variable display;
Character display means capable of displaying a character capable of executing a predetermined effect;
With
The notification production means is
When the production state control means is controlled to the first production state, the notification production by the first notification mode is executed,
When the production state control unit is controlled to the second production state different from the first production state, the notification production by the second notification mode different from the first notification mode is executed,
The image display device can simultaneously display a first image and a second image which is an image different from the first image;
When the first image and the second image is displayed overlapping, Ri can der be displayed by at least a portion of the overlapping portion in the front side of the image in a transmissive state,
When the predetermined display acts on the character, it is possible to cause the character to execute the predetermined effect,
There are a plurality of display modes of the predetermined display corresponding to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state,
The lower the degree of expectation that the display mode of the predetermined display is controlled to the advantageous state, the higher the rate of acting on the character.
A gaming machine characterized by that.